Amsco® century® medium steam sterilizers

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Amsco® Century® Medium Steam Sterilizers26" x 37.5" (660 x 950 mm)• Prevacuum • SFPP

(05/10/02) P-764330-117

i764330-117

A Word From STERIS Corporation

ADVISORY

The operation and maintenance procedures recom-mended by STERIS® are described in this manual.Only these recommended maintenance proceduresshould be followed.

A listing of the safety precautions to be observedwhen operating and servicing this equipment can befound in Section 1 of this manual. Do not operate orservice this equipment until you have become famil-iar with this information.

Any alteration of this equipment not authorized orperformed by STERIS Engineering Service whichcould affect its operation will void the warranty,could adversely affect sterilization efficacy, couldviolate federal, state, and local regulations, and couldjeopardize your insurance coverage.

INDICATIONS FOR USE

The Amsco® Century® Medium Steam Sterilizer isdesigned for sterilization of heat- and moisture-stabile materials used in healthcare facilities and isavailable in two medium size models:

• Prevacuum–designed for sterilization of heat andmoisture-stabile materials. The Prevacuum steril-izer is equipped with Prevacuum, Gravity, Liq-uid, Leak Test and DART (Bowie-Dick) cycles.

• Steam Flush Pressure Pulse (SFPP)–designed forsterilization of heat and moisture-stabile materi-als. The SFPP sterilizer is equipped with SFPP,WRAP/SFPP, Prevacuum, Gravity, Liquid, LeakTest and DART (Bowie-Dick) cycles.

This sterilizer is specifically designed to only pro-cess goods using the cycles as specified in this manual.If there is any doubt about a specific material orproduct, contact the manufacturer of that productfor the recommended sterilization technique.

© 2002, STERIS Corporation All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.

ii764330-117

Factory-Set Cycles and Cycle Values

Table 1A. Prevacuum Sterilizer Cycles and Cycle Values

Cycles: Sterilize Sterilize Dry Recommended ValidationTemp. Time Time Load Standard

1. PREVAC1. PREVAC1. PREVAC1. PREVAC1. PREVAC 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 5 MIN. Single Fabric Pack ST-8

2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 20 MIN. Double-wrapped instrument trays, max. ST-8weight of 17 lbs (7.7 kg) each. Fabric packs.Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.

3. GRAVITY3. GRAVITY3. GRAVITY3. GRAVITY3. GRAVITY 250°F (121°C) 30 MIN. 15 MIN. Fabric packs. ST-8Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.

4. LIQUID4. LIQUID4. LIQUID4. LIQUID4. LIQUID 250°F (121°C) 45 MIN. 0 MIN. Refer to Table 3-3 for guidelines. ST-8

Table 1B. Steam Flush Pressure-Pulse Sterilizer Cycles and Cycle Values


1. WRAP/1. WRAP/1. WRAP/1. WRAP/1. WRAP/ 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 20 MIN. Double-wrapped instrument trays, max. wt.: ST-8 SFPPSFPPSFPPSFPPSFPP 17 lbs (7.7 kg) each. Non-porous Goods, only.

Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.

2. SFPP2. SFPP2. SFPP2. SFPP2. SFPP 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 20 MIN. Fabric Packs ST-8Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.

3. PREVAC3. PREVAC3. PREVAC3. PREVAC3. PREVAC 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 20 MIN. Double-wrapped instrument trays, max. wt.: ST-817 lbs (7.7 kg) each. Fabric Packs.Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.


Test Cycles Sterilize Sterilize Dry Recommended Validationfor All Units Temp. Time Time Load Standard5. Leak Test5. Leak Test5. Leak Test5. Leak Test5. Leak Test11111 270°F (132°C) N/A N/A N/A ST-8

6. DART Test6. DART Test6. DART Test6. DART Test6. DART Test11111 270°F (132°C) 3-1/2 MIN. 1 MIN. DARTor Bowie-Dick ST-8Test Pack

7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up11111 270°F (132°C) 3 MIN. 1 MIN. N/A N/A

1 Not adjustable.

iii764330-117

TEMP ............ 98 F 1PRESS .......... 00 psigSTATUS ....... DOOR OPEN

1 2 3 4PREVAC PREVAC GRAVITY LIQUID270 F 270 F 250 F 250 FS= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 30:00 S= 45:00D= 5:00 D= 20:00 D= 15:00 D= 00:00

00:00:00 AM 00/00/00

PAPER MOREFEED CYCLESMENU STANDBY

TEMP ............ 98° F 1PRESS .......... 0.00 psigSTATUS ....... DOOR OPEN

1 2 3 4WRAP/SFPP SFPP PREVAC GRAVITY

270 F 270 F 270 F 250 FS= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 30:00D= 20:00 D= 20:00 D= 20:00 D= 15:00

00:00:00 AM 00/00/00


Prevacuum SterilizerMenu Screen

Steam Flush Pressure PulseSterilizer Menu Screen

Cycle SelectionTouch Pads

Liquid Cycle Processing GuidelinesMinimum Recommended

Number of Volume of Liquid Sterilize Time at 250°F (121°C)Containers in One Container in minutes

3 1000 mL 45

Recommended Loads by Sterilizer Size 1

Wrapped FabricInstrument Trays Packs

2626262626 xxxxx 37.537.537.537.537.5 xxxxx 36" (66036" (66036" (66036" (66036" (660 xxxxx 950950950950950 xxxxx 910)910)910)910)910) 9 18



1 Refer to Tables 1A and 1B to determine cycle use guidelines.

iv764330-117

ManufacturedExclusively by

STERIS Corporation Erie, PA

ISO 9001EN 46001ISO 13485Certified

0 1 2 3EC Authorized RepresentativeSTERIS Ltd.STERIS HouseJays CloseViablesBasingstokeHampshireRG22 4AXUNITED KINGDOM

Tel: +44 (0)1256 840400Fax: +44 (0) 1256 866502

Manufactured by:

STERIS Corporation2424 West 23rd StreetErie, PA 16506 • USA

Tel: 814 452 3100Fax: 814 870 8338

STERIS Offices WorldwideCanada 800 661 3937Germany 49 22 33 69990Italy 39 01 41 590429Japan 81 78 321 2271Korea 82 2 517 1517Latin America 305 442 8202Singapore 65 68 41 7677Spain 34 91 658 5920United Kingdom 44 1256 840400

www.steris.com

The base language of this documentis ENGLISH. Any translations mustbe made from the base languagedocument.

STERIS Corporation5960 Heisley Road

Mentor, OH 44060-1834 USA440-354-2600 • 800-548-4873

www.steris.com

v764330-117

Section 1: Listing of Warnings and Cautions.................................................................. 1-1

Section 2: General Information ........................................................................................ 2-12.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 2-12.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................... 2-1

Section 3: Operating Instructions .................................................................................... 3-13.1 BEFORE OPERATING THE STERILIZER ...................................................................................... 3-13.2 PREPARING LOADS FOR STERILIZATION CYCLES .................................................................... 3-43.3 GUIDELINES FOR PLACEMENT OF VARIOUS LOADS ................................................................ 3-43.4 UNLOADING THE STERILIZER...................................................................................................... 3-43.5 LOADING CAR INSTRUCTIONS: LOADING .................................................................................. 3-53.6 LOADING CAR INSTRUCTIONS: UNLOADING ............................................................................. 3-53.7 LOADING/UNLOADING STERILIZER: RACK AND SHELVES........................................................ 3-63.8 STERILIZER (FACTORY) CYCLE SETTINGS ................................................................................ 3-63.9 PREVACUUM STERILIZER CYCLES ............................................................................................. 3-63.10 SFPP STERILIZER CYCLES .......................................................................................................... 3-73.11 PREVAC CYCLE 270°F (132°C) ..................................................................................................... 3-83.12 GRAVITY CYCLE .......................................................................................................................... 3-103.13 LIQUID CYCLE ............................................................................................................................. 3-123.14 WRAP/SFPP CYCLE, 270°F (132°C) ............................................................................................ 3-143.15 SFPP CYCLE, 270°F (132°C) ....................................................................................................... 3-163.16 TEST CYCLES .............................................................................................................................. 3-18

3.16.1 DART (Bowie-Dick) Test ................................................................................................... 3-183.16.2 Vacuum Leak Test ............................................................................................................ 3-20

3.17 ABORTING CYCLES .................................................................................................................... 3-213.18 EMERGENCY DOOR OPENING PROCEDURE .......................................................................... 3-223.19 CYCLE GRAPHS .......................................................................................................................... 3-23

Section 4: Principles of Operation ................................................................................... 4-14.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 4-14.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................... 4-14.3 CENTURY CONTROL THEORY OF OPERATION .......................................................................... 4-24.4 MAIN CONTROL ............................................................................................................................. 4-2

A. Incoming Power Terminal Block .................................................................................... 4-2B. Power Switch ............................................................................................................... 4-2C. Line Filter ..................................................................................................................... 4-2D. Connector Board .......................................................................................................... 4-2E. Power Supply (see Figure 4-1) ..................................................................................... 4-2

4.4.1 CPU Board ............................................................................................................................. 4-2A. CPU Chip ..................................................................................................................... 4-2B. Flash Memory .............................................................................................................. 4-2C. Static RAM ................................................................................................................... 4-2D. A/D Converter Section ................................................................................................. 4-2E. Battery Back-up ........................................................................................................... 4-5

4.4.1.1 CPU Board Setup ............................................................................................................... 4-5A. Flash Chip Change ...................................................................................................... 4-5B. Jumpers ....................................................................................................................... 4-5C. LED Display on CPU Board ......................................................................................... 4-5

continued on next page

Table of Contents

Section Title Page

vi764330-117

4.4.2 I/O BOARD ......................................................................................................................... 4-5A. Overview ...................................................................................................................... 4-5B. I/O Configuration .......................................................................................................... 4-5

4.5 DISPLAY ......................................................................................................................................... 4-8A. Touch Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-8B. Display Module ............................................................................................................. 4-8C. Display Interface Board ................................................................................................ 4-8D. Printer Board Assembly ............................................................................................... 4-8E. Power Supply ............................................................................................................... 4-8F. Speaker ........................................................................................................................ 4-8G. Printer ........................................................................................................................ 4-10H. Paper Take Up Mechanism......................................................................................... 4-10

4.6 ANALOG DEVICES....................................................................................................................... 4-104.6.1 Pressure Transducer (See Figure 4-6) .............................................................................. 4-104.6.2 RTD (See Figure 4-7) ....................................................................................................... 4-10

4.7 CYCLES AND PHASES ................................................................................................................ 4-124.7.1 Prevacuum Cycle ............................................................................................................. 4-12

A. Jacket Temperature - Out of Cycle ............................................................................. 4-12B. Activate Seal(s) .......................................................................................................... 4-12C. Purge ......................................................................................................................... 4-12D. Vacuum Pulse ............................................................................................................ 4-12E. Pressure Pulse ........................................................................................................... 4-12F. Charge ....................................................................................................................... 4-12G. Sterilize ...................................................................................................................... 4-12H. Fast Exhaust .............................................................................................................. 4-12I. Dry ............................................................................................................................. 4-12J. Air Break .................................................................................................................... 4-12K. Retract Seals ............................................................................................................. 4-12L. Complete .................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.7.2 Gravity Cycle .................................................................................................................... 4-13A. Jacket Temperature - Out of Cycle ............................................................................. 4-13B. Activate Seal(s) .......................................................................................................... 4-13C. Purge ......................................................................................................................... 4-13D. Charge ....................................................................................................................... 4-13E. Sterilize ...................................................................................................................... 4-13F. Fast Exhaust .............................................................................................................. 4-13G. Dry ............................................................................................................................. 4-13H. Air Break .................................................................................................................... 4-13I. Retract Seals ............................................................................................................. 4-13J. Complete .................................................................................................................... 4-13

4.7.3 SFPP Cycles .................................................................................................................... 4-13A. Jacket Temperature - Out of Cycle ............................................................................. 4-13B. Activate Seal(s) .......................................................................................................... 4-13C. Purge ......................................................................................................................... 4-13D. Exhaust Pulse after Purge.......................................................................................... 4-14E. Steam Flush after Purge ............................................................................................ 4-14F. Pressure Pulse ........................................................................................................... 4-14G. Exhaust Pulse ............................................................................................................ 4-14H. Pressure Pulse Steam Flush ...................................................................................... 4-14I. Charge ....................................................................................................................... 4-14J. Sterilize ...................................................................................................................... 4-14K. Fast Exhaust .............................................................................................................. 4-14L. Dry ................................................................................................................................ 4-14


Section Title Page

vii764330-117

M. Air Break ...................................................................................................................... 4-14N. Retract Seals ............................................................................................................. 4-14O. Complete .................................................................................................................... 4-14

4.7.4 Liquid Cycle ...................................................................................................................... 4-15A. Jacket Temperature - Out of Cycle ............................................................................. 4-15B. Activate Seal(s) .......................................................................................................... 4-15C. Purge ......................................................................................................................... 4-15D. Charge ....................................................................................................................... 4-15E. Sterilize ...................................................................................................................... 4-15F. Slow Exhaust ............................................................................................................. 4-15G. Air Break .................................................................................................................... 4-15H. Retract Seals ............................................................................................................. 4-15I. Cracked Door Phase .................................................................................................. 4-15J. Complete .................................................................................................................... 4-15

Section 5: Service Mode ................................................................................................... 5-15.1 ACCESS SERVICE MODE ............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1.1 Scientific Sterilizers ............................................................................................................ 5-15.2 ACCESS SERVICE MODE ............................................................................................................. 5-2

5.2.1 Healthcare Sterilizers ......................................................................................................... 5-25.3 CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.3.1 Calibration Overview........................................................................................................... 5-55.3.2 Calibrate Temperature ........................................................................................................ 5-5

A. Steam Method of Calibration ........................................................................................ 5-6A1. Calibrate Chamber Recorder Temperature ................................................................... 5-6A2. Calibrate Jacket Temperature ....................................................................................... 5-8A3. Calibrate Waste Temperature ....................................................................................... 5-9B. Oil Bath Method of Calibration .................................................................................... 5-10C. Load Values Method of Temperature Calibration ........................................................ 5-12

5.3.3 Pressure Calibration ......................................................................................................... 5-13A. Steam Method of Pressure Calibration ....................................................................... 5-14B. External Method of Pressure Calibration .................................................................... 5-15C. Load Values Method of Pressure Calibration .............................................................. 5-17

5.3.4 Temperature/Pressure Units ............................................................................................. 5-18A. Pressure Units ........................................................................................................... 5-18B. Temperature Units ...................................................................................................... 5-19

5.3.5 Temperature/Pressure Verification .................................................................................... 5-195.3.6 Calibration History ............................................................................................................ 5-19

5.4 INPUT/OUTPUT TESTS ............................................................................................................... 5-205.5.1 Safety Valve Tests ............................................................................................................. 5-215.5.2 Door Sensor Adjustments ................................................................................................. 5-21

5.5 ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 5-215.5.3 Door Pressure Settings .................................................................................................... 5-215.5.4 Leak Test .......................................................................................................................... 5-21

5.6 VALVE HISTORY........................................................................................................................... 5-225.6.1 Valve Service .................................................................................................................... 5-225.6.2 View Valve Actuation History ............................................................................................ 5-225.6.3 View Valve Cycle Count History ........................................................................................ 5-23


Section Title Page

viii764330-117

5.7 ALARM MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 5-235.7.1 Alarm List ......................................................................................................................... 5-235.7.2 Alarm Log ......................................................................................................................... 5-245.7.3 Show Screens .................................................................................................................. 5-245.7.4 Pushbutton Test ................................................................................................................ 5-245.7.5 Battery Saver .................................................................................................................... 5-255.7.6 Configure Machine ........................................................................................................... 5-25

5.7.6.1 Set Configurations ................................................................................................ 5-255.8 CHANGE VALUES ........................................................................................................................ 5-26

Section 6: Inspection and Maintenance .......................................................................... 6-16.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .................................................................................. 6-16.2 CLEAN CHAMBER DRAIN STRAINER .......................................................................................... 6-36.3 CLEAN CHAMBER ......................................................................................................................... 6-36.4 FLUSH CHAMBER DRAIN – PERFORM WEEKLY ......................................................................... 6-36.5 CHANGE PRINTER PAPER ROLL ................................................................................................ 6-4

6.5.1 Change Printer Ink Cartridge .............................................................................................. 6-6

Section 7: Field Test Procedures ..................................................................................... 7-17.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 7-17.2 TEST INSTRUMENTATION REQUIRED ......................................................................................... 7-17.3 INSTALLATION DATA ...................................................................................................................... 7-17.4 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION ...................................................................................................... 7-17.5 CONTROL SETUP .......................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.5.1 Loss of Power Test .............................................................................................................. 7-17.5.2 Control Input and Wiring Check .......................................................................................... 7-17.5.3 Control Output and Wiring Check ....................................................................................... 7-2

7.6 TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION ..................................................................................................... 7-27.7 PRESSURE CALIBRATION ............................................................................................................ 7-27.8 DOOR ADJUSTMENT VERIFICATION ........................................................................................... 7-3

7.8.1 Hinge Door ......................................................................................................................... 7-37.8.2 Hinge Door Adjusting Procedure ........................................................................................ 7-37.8.3 Sliding Door ........................................................................................................................ 7-6

7.8.3.1 General ................................................................................................................... 7-67.8.3.2 Upper Rail Assembly and Adjustment ..................................................................... 7-67.8.3.3 Door Fore/Aft Follower Assemblies Adjustment ...................................................... 7-87.8.3.4 Door Adjustment and Function Check .................................................................... 7-97.8.3.5 Door Drive Cable Tension Adjustment ................................................................... 7-107.8.3.6 Door Open Sensor Adjustment ............................................................................. 7-117.8.3.7 Door Shock Absorber Adjustment ......................................................................... 7-117.8.3.8 Final Door Operation Check.................................................................................. 7-12

7.9 SAFETY VALVE TEST AND REGULATOR VALVE SETTING ....................................................... 7-127.10 VACUUM PUMP TEST .................................................................................................................. 7-12

7.10.1 Vacuum Pump Water Flow Rate ....................................................................................... 7-127.10.2 Vacuum Pump Performance Test ...................................................................................... 7-12

7.11 LEAK TEST ................................................................................................................................... 7-127.12 PERFORMANCE TEST ................................................................................................................ 7-13

Section Title Page


ix764330-117

Section 8: Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 8-18.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Typical Alarm Screen .......................................................................................................... 8-18.2.1 Too Long In Charge ............................................................................................................ 8-28.1.2 Typical Alarm Printout ......................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 IN-CYCLE ALARMS ........................................................................................................................ 8-28.2.2 Too Long In Exhaust ........................................................................................................... 8-38.2.3 Too Long In Evacuation ...................................................................................................... 8-38.2.4 Too Long In Air Break ......................................................................................................... 8-48.2.5 Under Sterilize Temperature ............................................................................................... 8-58.2.6 Over Sterilize Temperature ................................................................................................. 8-68.2.7 Door Unsealed ................................................................................................................... 8-78.2.8 Chamber Pressure/Temperature Failure ............................................................................. 8-78.2.9 No Pump Water .................................................................................................................. 8-88.2.10 Exhaust Rate Too Fast ........................................................................................................ 8-98.2.11 Exhaust Rate Too Slow ....................................................................................................... 8-98.2.12 Recorder Deviation Alarm................................................................................................. 8-108.2.13 Door Pressure Failure (Hinged Door Models Only) ........................................................... 8-11

8.3 OUT-OF-CYCLE ALARMS ............................................................................................................ 8-128.3.1 Too Long To Close Door ................................................................................................... 8-128.3.2 Too Long To Open Door .................................................................................................... 8-138.3.3 Pressure In Chamber ....................................................................................................... 8-138.3.4 Waste Temperature Probe Failure ..................................................................................... 8-148.3.5 Display Error ..................................................................................................................... 8-158.3.6 Atmospheric Pressure Alarm ............................................................................................ 8-158.3.7 Relay #1 Failure ................................................................................................................ 8-168.3.8 Relay #2 Failure ................................................................................................................ 8-178.3.9 Relay #3 Failure ................................................................................................................ 8-178.3.10 RTC Failure ...................................................................................................................... 8-178.3.11 ROM Failure ..................................................................................................................... 8-188.3.12 RAM Failure ...................................................................................................................... 8-188.3.13 ADC Failure ...................................................................................................................... 8-18

8.4 SENSOR ALARMS ....................................................................................................................... 8-198.4.1 Water In Chamber ............................................................................................................ 8-198.4.2 Too Long In Jacket Charge ............................................................................................... 8-198.4.3 Too Long To Seal Door ..................................................................................................... 8-208.4.4 Too Long To Unseal Door ................................................................................................. 8-218.4.5 Chamber Pressure Transducer Failure ............................................................................. 8-218.4.6 Chamber Temperature Probe Failure ................................................................................ 8-228.4.7 Jacket Temperature Probe Failure .................................................................................... 8-238.4.8 Door Switch Failure .......................................................................................................... 8-238.4.9 Recorder Temperature Probe Failure .................................................................................... 8-248.4.10 Board Overtemp Failure ................................................................................................... 8-25

Section Title Page


x764330-117

Section 9: Component Replacement and Repair............................................................ 9-19.1 AIR FILTER ..................................................................................................................................... 9-19.2 SOLENOID VALVES ....................................................................................................................... 9-19.3 CHECK VALVES ............................................................................................................................. 9-19.4 STEAM TRAPS ............................................................................................................................... 9-19.5 STEAM PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE .................................................................................... 9-1

9.5.1 Disassembly ....................................................................................................................... 9-19.5.2 Reassembly ........................................................................................................................ 9-2

9.6 SAFETY VALVE .............................................................................................................................. 9-39.7 STRAINERS .................................................................................................................................... 9-39.8 HEAT EXCHANGER ....................................................................................................................... 9-39.9 VACUUM PUMP ............................................................................................................................. 9-39.10 CPU BOARD ................................................................................................................................... 9-39.11 FLASH MEMORY CHIPS — U13, U16, U15 AND U12 ................................................................... 9-49.12 BATTERY ........................................................................................................................................ 9-59.13 I/O BOARD ...................................................................................................................................... 9-59.14 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................................................ 9-69.15 MAIN CONTROL BOX..................................................................................................................... 9-69.16 CONNECTOR BOARD .................................................................................................................... 9-69.17 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY ...................................................................................................................... 9-79.18 PRINTER BOARD ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................................... 9-7

Section 10: Illustrated Parts Breakdown ....................................................................... 10-110.1 HOW TO USE THE ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN .......................................................... 10-110.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PACKS ........................................................................................ 10-1

Section Title Page

1-1764330-117

Section 1: Listing of Warnings and Cautions

The following is a listing of safety precautions which must be observed when operating or servicing thisequipment. WARNINGS indicate the potential for danger to personnel, and CAUTIONS indicate thepotential for damage to equipment. These precautions are repeated (in whole or in part), where applicable,throughout the manual.

Observance of these safety precautions will minimize the risk of personal injury and/or the possible use ofimproper maintenance methods which may damage the unit or render it unsafe. It is important to understandthat these precautions are not exhaustive. STERIS® could not possibly know, evaluate and advise maintenancedepartments of all conceivable ways in which maintenance might be done or the possible hazardousconsequences of each way.

WARNING–ELECTRIC SHOCK AND BURN HAZARD:

Disconnect all utilities to sterilizer before servicing. Do not service the sterilizer unless all utilitieshave been properly locked out. Always follow OSHA Lockout-Tagout and electrical safety-relatedwork practice standards. (See CFR 1910.147 and .331 through .335.)

WARNING–PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD:

Avoid personal injury from bursting bottles. Liquid sterilization cycle must only be used for liquidsin borosilicate (Pyrex) flasks with vented closures.

WARNING:

It is inappropriate for a healthcare facility to sterilize liquids for direct patient contact.

WARNING–BURN HAZARD:

When sterilizing liquids, to prevent personal injury or property damage resulting from burstingbottles and hot fluid, you must observe the following procedures:

• Use Liquid cycle only; no other cycle is safe for processing liquids.

• Use only vented closures; do not use screw caps or rubber stoppers with crimped seal.

• Use only Type I borosilicate glass bottles; do not use ordinary glass bottles or any containernot designed for sterilization.

• Do not allow hot bottles to be jolted; this can cause hot-bottle explosions. Do not move bottlesif any boiling or bubbling is present.

Sterilizer, rack/shelves, and loading car will be hot after cycle is run. Always wear protectivegloves and apron when removing a processed load. Protective gloves and apron must be wornwhen reloading sterilizer following the previous operation.

Do not attempt to open the sterilizer door if a WATER IN CHAMBER ALARM condition exists. Calla qualified service technician before attempting to use sterilizer further.

1-2764330-117

WARNING – BURN HAZARD: (CONTINUED)

After manual exhaust, steam may remain inside the chamber. Always wear protective gloves,apron, and a face shield when following emergency procedure to unload sterilizer. Stay as farback from the chamber opening as possible when opening the door.

For Prevauum, Gravity or SFPP cycles, if 0 (zero) dry time is selected, steam vapors will be releasedwhen opening door. Step back away from the door when opening door. Door should only be opened2-3 inches (50-75 mm) until no more vapors are seen, before opening the door fully.

Allow sterilizer to cool to room temperature before performing any cleaning or maintenanceprocedures.

Failure to shut off the steam supply when cleaning or replacing strainers can result in seriousinjury.

Jacket pressure must be 0 psig (0 bar) before beginning work on the steam trap.

Proper testing of the safety valve requires the valve to be operated under pressure. Exhaust fromthe safety valve is hot and can cause burns. Proper safety attire (gloves, eye protection,insulated overall) as designated by OSHA, is required. Testing is to be performed by qualifiedservice personnel only.

WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD:

This sterilizer is not designed to process flammable compounds.

WARNING – FALL HAZARD:

To prevent falls, keep floors dry by immediately wiping up any spilled liquids or condensation insterilizer loading or unloading area.

WARNING – PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD:

Regularly scheduled preventive maintenance is required for safe and reliable operation of thisequipment. Contact your STERIS service representative to schedule preventive maintenance.

When closing the chamber door, keep hands and arms out of the door opening and make sureopening is clear of obstructions.

Repairs and adjustments to this equipment must be made only by fully qualified servicepersonnel. Maintenance performed by inexperienced, unqualified persons or installation ofunauthorized parts could cause personal injury or result in costly equipment damage.

WARNING – STERILITY ASSURANCE HAZARD:

Load sterility may be compromised if the biological indicator or air leak test indicates a potentialproblem. If these indicators show a potential problem, refer the situation to a qualified servicetechnician before using the sterilizer further.

According to AAMI standards, a measured leak rate greater than 1 mm Hg/minute (1.3 mbar/min)indicates a problem with the sterilizer. Refer the situation to a qualified service technician beforeusing the sterilizer further.

1-3764330-117

CAUTION – POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE:

Gasket must be fully retracted prior to operating sterilizer door.

Never use a wire brush, abrasives, or steel wool on door and chamber assembly. Do not use cleanerscontaining chloride on stainless-steel surfaces. Chloride-based cleaners will deteriorate stainlesssteel, eventually leading to failure of the vessel.

Allow thermostatic traps to cool down to room temperature before removing cover. Since there isnothing to limit expansion, the bellows may rupture or fatigue if trap is opened while hot.

Actuation at less than 75% of rated pressure can allow debris to contaminate the seat and cause thesafety valve to leak. A leaking safety valve must be replaced.

Insufficient service clearance will make repairs more difficult and time-consuming.

Piping sizing too small may cause water hammer, resulting in damage to the sterilizer.

After installation, it is mandatory to brace piping at the drain funnel so that it will not move vertically.

Make sure door opening is clear of any obstruction before closing the door(s).

Do not attempt to open sterilizer door during manual operation unless chamber is at 0 psig.

During manual operation, gasket must be fully retracted prior to operating sterilizer door.

Immediately wipe up saline solution spills on loading car, to prevent damage to stainless steel.

Do not use cleaners containing chlorides on loading cars. Chloride-based cleaners will deterioratethe loading car metal.

Sterilization of chloride-containing solutions (e.g., saline) can cause chamber corrosion and is notrecommended by the manufacturer. If, however, chloride-containing solutions must be processed,clean the chamber after each use.

2-1764330-117

Section 2: General Information

The product literature included in this section con-tains factual data relating to the principal character-istics of the Amsco® Century® Medium Steam Steril-izers.

The literature is informative rather than instruc-tional. It provides and conveys, through text andillustrations, a general concept of the equipment, itspurpose, limitations, and technical applications.

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Amsco Century Medium Steam Sterilizers areused to sterilize heat- and moisture stable goods inHealthcare of industrial facilities.

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Overall Exterior Dimensions W x L x H —

36" Sterilizer:

Hinged Door – 44 x 51-1/2 x 75-1/4"(1118 x 1308 x 1911 mm)

Sliding Door – 70 x 57 x 75-1/4"(1778 x 1448 x 1911 mm)

48" Sterilizer:



60" Sterilizer:



Weight (Fully Loaded) —

36" Sterilizer: 3800 lbs (1720 kg)



Utility Requirements —

Electric:

Controls: 120V, 2A, 1-phase

Vacuum Pump: 208/240 V, 6A, 3-phase, or 480 V, 3A, 3-phase

Water:

Pressure: 20 to 50 psig (1.4 to 3.5 bar)

Temperature: 70°F (21°C) maximum

Consumption: 15 gpm (57 lpm), peak

Steam:

Pressure: 50 to 80 psig (3.5 to 5.2 bar)

Consumption:

36" Sterilizer: 190 lb/hr (86 kg/hr)



See Tech Datas in this section.

AMSCO® CENTURYTM MEDIUM STEAMSTERILIZER 26" X 37.5" – NORTH AMERICA

• Hinged door with fast operating, low-effort door lock mechanism. Doorhandle lock lever requires a single30° handle movement to lock orunlock.

• Horizontal-sliding door with quiet,motor-driven cable and pulleymechanism. Door travels horizon-tally right to left to open, and iscontrolled from the touch screen.

APPLICATION

Two configurations are available forsterilization of heat- and moisture-stable materials used in healthcarefacilities:

• Prevacuum – designed for fast,efficient sterilization of heat- andmoisture-stable materials. Pre-vacuum configuration sterilizers areequipped with prevacuum, gravity,liquid, leak test, and daily air removal(Bowie-Dick) test cycles.

• Steam Flush Pressure Pulse(SFPP) – designed for fast, efficientsterilization of heat- and moisture-stable materials. This configurationsterilizer uses the Steam FlushPressure Pulse cycle, which featuresan above-atmospheric pressure levelconditioning phase. SFPP sterilizersare equipped with SFPP, WRAP/SFPP, prevacuum, gravity, liquid,leak test, and daily air removal(Bowie-Dick) test cycles.

DESCRIPTION

Amsco Century Medium SteamSterilizers are equipped with the latestfeatures in both state-of-the-arttechnology and ease of use.

Primary Product Features

Interior Chamber Dimensions• 26 x 37.5x 36" (660 x 950 x 910 mm)

• 26 x 37.5 x 48" (660 x 950 x 1220 mm)

• 26 x 37.5 x 60" (660 x 950 x 1520 mm)

48" and 60" configurations includechoice of a single or double door; 36"configuration provides single door,only.

TYPE❏ Prevacuum❏ Steam Flush Pressure Pulse (SFPP)

SIZE❏ 26 x 37.5 x 36" (660 x 950 x 910 mm)

(single door only)❏ 26 x 37.5 x 48" (660 x 950 x 1220 mm)❏ 26 x 37.5 x 60" (660 x 950 x 1520 mm)

STEAM SOURCE❏ Building Steam

VACUUM PUMP ELECTRIC SERVICE❏ 208/240 VAC, 60 hz, 3-Phase, 6A per phase❏ 480 VAC, 60 hz, 3-Phase, 3A per phase

DOOR CONFIGURATION❏ Single-door

❏ Hinged❏ Horizontal-slidingSelect direction of door swing or slide toopen, as viewed from Sterilizer's Operating End:

❏ Left-hand❏ Right-hand (not available for sliding-

door units)

The Selections Checked Below Apply To This Equipment

ACCESSORIES❏ 36" (910 mm) Chamber Length❏ 48" (1220 mm) Chamber Length❏ 60" (1520 mm) Chamber Length

❏ Loading Car❏ Transfer Carriage❏ Chamber Track Assembly ❏ Single Door ❏ Double Door❏ Loading Car, Transfer Carriage, and

Track Assembly ❏ Single Door ❏ Double Door

❏ (36" Units, only) Chamber Rack and Shelf

❏ Seismic Tie-down Kit

❏ Double-door*❏ Hinged DoorNOTE: Operating End hinge position listedfirst; Non-operating End hinge listed second.

❏ Right-hand/Left-hand❏ Right-hand/Right-hand❏ Left-hand/Right-hand❏ Left-hand/Left-hand

❏ Horizontal-sliding DoorNOTE: Operating End slide direction listed first;Non-operating End slide direction listedsecond.

❏ Left-hand/Right-hand

SINGLE-DOOR MOUNTING❏ Cabinet Enclosed/Freestanding❏ Recessed

DOUBLE-DOOR MOUNTING❏ Recessed through One Wall❏ Recessed through Two Walls

* 26 x 37.5 x 36" sterilizers not available indouble-door configuration.

SD724 (02/01/02)

(Typical only - some details may vary.)

Item

Location(s)

Hinged Door ModelHorizontal-sliding Door

Model

2

Century control system with en-hanced functionality and user-friendlyinterface screen.

• Touch-sensitive screen with 30-linex 40-character display area

• Ink-on-paper impact printer

• Help screens for programming andtroubleshooting alarm conditions

• Automatic check of control programand cycle data maintains processintegrity.

• Vacuum pump is supplied on allunits to effectively pull chamber tospecified vacuum levels, as well asreduce water consumption.

STANDARDS

Each sterilizer meets applicablerequirements of the following listingsand standards, and carries theappropriate symbols:

• Underwriters Laboratory (UL)Standard 3101 as certified by ETLTesting Laboratories, Inc.

• Canadian Standards Association(CSA) Standard C22.2, No. 1010.

• ASME Code, Section VIII, Division1 for unfired pressure vessels. Thepressure vessel is so stamped;ASME Form U-1 is furnished. Shelland door are constructed to with-stand working pressure of 45 psig(3.1 bar).

FEATURES

26 x 37.5" chamber cross-section issized to allow for efficient, high-volumeprocessing of sterilization.

Fast-operating, low-effort manualdoor lock mechanism (hinged-doormodels) allows door to be locked orunlocked using a single 30° handlemotion.

Horizontal-sliding Power Door iscontrolled from the touch screendisplay. The door slides horizontally ona rigid rail assembly housed withinstainless-steel paneling. Door drivesystem consists of a cable and pulleyarrangement driven by an electricmotor.

Prevacuum configuration sterilizersare factory programmed with thefollowing cycles: Prevacuum (witheither 5-minute or 20-minute dryphases), Gravity, Liquid, and TestCycles.

SFPP configuration sterilizers arefactory programmed with the followingcycles: Wrap/SFPP, SFPP, Prevacuum,Gravity, Liquid, and Test Cycles.

See cycle descriptions below for moredetails:

• Prevacuum Cycle: For efficient,high-volume processing of heat- andmoisture-stable materials, such asfabrics and wrapped hard goods.This process incorporates a series ofpressure/vacuum pulses to conditionthe load prior to sterilization.

» Sterilize temperature:270°F (132°C)

» Sterilize time: 4 minutes» Dry time: 5 minutes or 20 minutes

• 250°F Gravity Cycle: For sterilizingfabrics.


» Sterilize time: 30 minutes» Dry time: 15 minutes

NOTE: A Gravity Cycle, adjusted to270°F for 25-minute sterilize expo-sure time, can be used for process-ing fabric packs.

• 270°F Gravity Cycle: For sterilizinghard goods.


» Sterilize time: 15 minutes» Dry time: 30 minutesNOTE: 270°F temperature must be set byuser.

• SFPP Cycle: For efficient, high-volume processing of porous loads.Process incorporates a series ofsteam flushes and pressure pulsesat pressures above atmospheric

Resistive Thermal Detectors (RTD)are installed for sterilizer temperaturecontrol. The dual element chamberdrain line RTD senses and controlstemperature variations within thesterilizer chamber. A jacket RTDprovides temperature control within thejacket space. These RTD signals,converted into electrical impulses,provide accurate control inputs andreadouts throughout entire cycle.

Electronic water saving controlincludes an RTD to control the amountof water used in condensing theexhausted chamber steam.

Software calibration is performed inthe service mode, accessible throughthe touch screen displays, andaccomplished using external or internaltemperature and pressure sources.Control system provides printed recordof all calibration data for verification tocurrent readings.

Automatic utilities start-up/shutdownpermits utilities conservation. Shut-down may be programmed to activateat the end of any designated cycle ortime of day. When activated, controlsystem automatically shuts off all utilityvalves, conserving steam and waterusage. Sterilizer utilities can berestarted either by programmed time ormanual operation. A different shutdownand restart time can be programmedfor each day.

Steam purge feature is provided toassist in air removal and to preheat theload.

Two-piece insulation sleeve is fittedaround exterior of the sterilizer vessel.The sleeve is sealed and held in placeby hook-and-loop closures. Insulationis asbestos-free and chloride-free,silicone impregnated, oil- and water-resistant fiberglass.

Lighted DIN connectors are installedon all steam, water, and exhaust valvesfor reliability and ease of maintenance.

PROCESSING CYCLES

All processing cycles factory pro-grammed into the sterilizer controlhave been validated to AAMI ST8.

3

levels to condition load prior tosterilization.



• Wrap/SFPP Cycle: For efficient,high-volume processing of heat-and moisture-stable materials,such as double-wrappedinstrument trays. This processincorporates a series of steamflushes and pressure pulses atpressures above atmosphericlevels to condition load prior tosterilization.



• Liquid Cycle: This cycle is usedfor sterilizing liquids in borosili-cate containers with ventedclosures.


» Factory programmed sterilize time:45 minutes

» Dry time: not applicableIMPORTANT: It is inappropriate for ahealthcare facility to sterilize liquids fordirect contact with patients.

TESTING CYCLES

• Vacuum Leak Test: This cycle isused for testing the vacuum integrityof the sterilizer’s piping. Sterilizerchamber must be empty whilerunning this test cycle. Prepro-grammed cycle parameters cannotbe adjusted by the user.

• DART (Bowie-Dick) Test Cycle:This cycle is used to conduct aBowie-Dick test on the sterilizer.Recommended load is a STERISDart® pack, or a properly prepared

Bowie-Dick test pack. Prepro-grammed cycle parameters cannotbe adjusted by the user.


» Sterilize time: 3.5 minutes» Dry time: 1 minute

CONTROL SYSTEM

Design Features

Century control system monitors andcontrols all sterilizer operations andfunctions. The control system isfactory-programmed with standardsterilizing cycles. All operator-acces-sible control functions can be changedusing the touch screen control.

IMPORTANT: If factory-programmedcycle values are changed, it is theresponsibility of the healthcare facilityto validate the efficacy of the changedcycle.

Cycle values and operating featuresmay be adjusted and verified prior tocycle operation. Cycle parameters areretained in control memory for re-peated use.

Once cycle is started, cycles andcycle values cannot be changed untilcycle is complete. If chamber tem-perature drops below set point duringthe exposure phase, the timer is set tostop and automatically reset oncenormal operating temperature isreached.

Critical control system componentsare housed within a sealed compart-ment to protect the components frommoisture and heat generated duringthe sterilization process. A cooling fanwith filter is installed in the housingcompartment to maintain positivepressure within the compartment,keeping components cool and dust-free.

Operator interface control panel,consisting of a touch screen andimpact printer, is located on theoperating (i.e., load or non-sterile) endof the sterilizer. If sterilizer is equippedwith double doors, an additional touchscreen is provided on the sterilizer'snon-operating (i.e., unload or sterile)end.

• Touch-sensitive Screen features a30-line x 40-character graphicsdisplay. All sterilizer functions,including cycle initiation and cycleconfiguration, are operated bypressing the touch-sensitive areason the display, referred to as "touchpads." Display indicates appropriatecontrol buttons, operator prompts,and status messages necessary toassist in sterilizer operation. Alldisplayed messages are completephrases with no codes to be cross-referenced. Display also indicatesany abnormal conditions that mayexist either in or out of a cycle.

• Ink-on-paper Impact Printer,located above touch screen,provides an easy-to-read printedrecord of all pertinent cycle data on2 1/4" wide paper. Data is automati-

ABORT STATUSPRINT

TEMP ................. 000 F 1PRESS ............... 00 PSIGSTATUS ............ DOOR OPEN

1 2 3 4WRAP/SFPP SFPP PREVAC GRAVITY270 F 270 F 270 F 250 FS= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 30:00D= 20:00 D= 20:00 D= 20:00 D= 15:00

MENU STANDBY

00:00 AM 00-00-00

PAPER MOREFEED CYCLES

Typical Touch Screen Displays

SFPP Configuration Sterilizer

ABORT

TEMP ................. 000 F 1PRESS ............... 00 PSIGSTATUS ............ DOOR OPEN


MENU STANDBY

00:00 AM 00-00-00


Prevac Configuration Sterilizer

4

cally printed at the beginning andend of each cycle and at transitionpoints during the cycle.

Printer take-up spool stores an entireroll of paper, providing cycle recordswhich can be saved for future refer-ence. Three paper tape rolls and twoprinter ribbons are furnished with eachunit.

Non-Operating End (NOE) ControlPanel, equipped on double-doorsterilizers only, includes a touch-sensitive screen similar to the operat-ing end screen. Preprogrammedcycles can be started from the NOEcontrol panel. Display concurrentlyshows the same information as theoperating end screen display.

Cycle Configuration is performed byaccessing the change values menuthrough the operating end touchscreen. In addition to adjustment ofcycle values, the following operatingparameters can also be changedthrough the change values menu:

• Time Display and Printout Units –AM/PM or 24-hour notation.

• Access Code – requires entry of afour-digit access code to operate thesterilizer and/or change the cyclevalues. Operating the sterilizer oraccessing Change Values menucauses display to request the entryof an access code. If access code isnot properly entered, display returnsto the standby or main menu screen,denying user access to the sterilizeror programming.

• Audible Signals are adjustable.Touch Pad and end-of-cyclesignals can be adjusted to one offour sound levels (off, low, medium,or high) as required for the operatingenvironment. Alarm signal can beadjusted to low, medium, or high (itcannot be turned off).

• Print Format – allows selection ofeither a full or condensed printout ofthe cycle information duringprocessing.

• Temperature Display and PrintoutUnits – Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius(°C). Temperature is set, displayed,controlled, and printed to the nearest1°. Recalibration is not requiredwhen changing temperature units.

• Pressure/Vacuum Display andPrintout Units – psig/In Hg or bar.Recalibration is not required whenchanging pressure units.

Technical Data

Control system consists of microcom-puter control boards and peripheralfunction circuit boards, located withinthe control PC board housing.

An internal battery backs up all cyclememory for up to 10 years. If a powerfailure occurs during a cycle, thebattery backup system assures thatcycle memory will be retained andproper cycle completion will occuronce power is restored. When power islost, the cycle is held in phase untilpower is restored, exceeding theminimum government specification of 1minute. Once power returns, the eventis recorded on the printout and thecycle automatically resumes orrestarts, depending on what phase thecycle was in at the time of power loss.If necessary, the operator can manu-ally abort the cycle.

SAFETY FEATURES

Control lockout switch – equipped onchamber door, senses when door sealis energized and tight against the door.Control prevents cycle from startinguntil the limit switch signal is received.If control loses appropriate signalduring cycle, alarm activates, cycleaborts, and chamber safely vents witha controlled exhaust.

Chamber float switch – activatesalarm, aborts cycle, and safely ventschamber with a controlled exhaust ifexcessive condensate is detected inthe vessel chamber.

Pressure relief valve – limits theamount of pressure buildup so that therated pressure in the vessel is notexceeded.

Power door safety feature – causesdoor drive to slip if the sliding doorencounters an obstruction during itsmovement.

CONSTRUCTION

Shell Assembly

Two fabricated Type 316L stainless-steel shells, welded one within theother, form the sterilizer vessel. Type316L stainless-steel end frame(s) iswelded to door end. On single doorunits, back of chamber is fitted withwelded, 316L stainless-steel dishedhead.

Sterilizer vessel is ASME rated at45 psig (3.1 bar) and insulated. Vesselincludes one 1"-NPT chamber port forcustomer use.

Steam-supply opening inside thechamber is shielded by a stainless-steel baffle.

Chamber Door(s)

Door is constructed of Type 316Lstainless steel.

During cycle operation, door is sealedby a steam-activated door seal. Doorseal is constructed of a special long-life rubber compound. When sterilizecycle is complete, the seal retractsunder vacuum into a machined groovein the sterilizer's end frame.

A long-life proximity switch is used bythe control to determine if door isclosed or locking plates are engaged.An additional seal pressure switchprevents inadvertent cycle initiation ifdoor is not sealed.

The door assembly is equipped with amechanical locking mechanism thatensures the door cannot be opened aslong as the seal is intact and energizedand more than 2 psi (0.14 bar) pres-sure is in the chamber.

The sterilizer door is fitted with astainless-steel panel that insulates theoperator from the chamber end frame,reducing the chance of accidentalcontact with a hot metal surface.

5

Chamber Drain System

Drain system is designed to preventsterilizer effluent from entering into thewater-supply system and sterilizer. Theautomatic condensing system, consist-ing of a stainless-steel plate-typecondenser, converts chamber steam tocondensate and disposes condensateto waste. Cooling water flow is regu-lated by the waste line RTD to minimizewater usage. Water supply shut offvalve is located in the recessed area ofthe unit.

Vacuum System

Vacuum pump reduces chamberpressure during prevacuum and post-drying phases. Air is drawn fromchamber through the vacuum system.Following dry phase, chamber vacuumis relieved to atmospheric pressure byadmitting air through a bacteria-retentive filter.

Steam Source

Sterilizers are piped, valved, andtrapped to receive building-suppliedsteam delivered at 50 to 80 psig (3.5 to5.6 bar) dynamic. Steam piping isconstructed of brass and includes ashut-off valve, steam strainer, and apressure regulator.

Piping

All piping connections terminate withinthe confines of the sterilizer and areaccessible from front and left side ofsterilizer.

• Solenoid Valves with DIN connec-tors simplify sterilizer piping and canbe serviced individually.

• Manual Shut-off Valves are pres-sure rated at 125 psig (8.62 bar) forsaturated steam. Valve handles arelow-heat conducting.

MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT

Sterilizers are arranged for eitherfreestanding or recessed installation,as specified. Each sterilizer is height-adjustable. Sterilizer subframe isequipped with a synthetic rubbergasket to support a tight fit betweenthe cabinet panels on freestandingunits or between the front cabinetpanel and wall partition on recessedunits.

On freestanding units, stainless-steelside panels and a louvered top panelenclose the sterilizer body and piping.

ACCESSORY

Seismic Tie-down Kit – conforms toTitle 24 California Code of Regulations,1993 Amendment Section 2336(B).

Material Handling Accessories –include stainless-steel chamber tracksand stainless-steel loading cars withpainted-steel carriages. Stainless-steelchamber rack and shelf are availablefor 36" (914 mm) sterilizers. Seeseparate product literature for details.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

A global network of skilled servicespecialists can provide periodicinspections, and adjustments to assurelow-cost peak performance. STERISrepresentatives can provide informa-tion regarding Annual MaintenanceAgreements.

NOTES

1. The sterilizer is not supplied with avacuum breaker or back-flowprevention device and, whererequired by local codes, installationof such a device in water line is byothers.

2. Pipe sizes shown indicate terminaloutlets only. Building service lines,provided by others, must supply thespecified pressures and flow rates.

3. Disconnect switches (with OFFposition lockout only; by others)should be installed in electric supplylines near the equipment.

4. Access to the recessing area fromthe control end of the sterilizer isrecommended.

5. Clearances shown are minimal forinstalling and servicing the equip-ment.

6. Depending on the loading equip-ment used, additional clearance isrequired:

• If shelves are used, length ofsterilizer plus 24" (610 mm) ateach door.

• If loading car and carriage will beused, twice the length of sterilizerat each door.

7. Floor drain should be providedwithin confines of sterilizer frame-work.

8. Units require minimum 38" (966 mm)door opening for transport withinfacility prior to installation.

UTILITY REQUIREMENTSSteam (S)

1" NPT, 50 to 80 psig (3.5 to 5.6 bar)dynamic, 97 percent to 100 percentvapor quality.

Drain (D)2" ODT drain terminal. (Floor draincapacity must handle peak waterconsumption; refer to EngineeringData.)

Electrical – Controls (EC)120 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1-phase, 2.0 A.

Electrical – Vacuum Pump (VP)• 208/240 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase,

6 A per phase.• 480 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase,

3 A per phase.

Sterilizer Feed Water (FW)1" NPT, 20 to 50 psig (2.1 to 3.5 bar)dynamic. Water is used for vacuumpump, heat exchanger, and trapcooling. Refer to Water QualityRecommendations listed on page 7.

NOTE: Back-flow prevention is byothers; not supplied on unit.

. . . CHECK LOCAL CODES . . .

6

Drain: 2" ODT drain terminal (Floor drain capacity must handle peak water consumption.)

Electric: Control: 120 volt, single phase, 50/60 Hz, 2 AVacuum Pump • 208/240, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz, 6 A per phase, or

• • • • • 480 volt, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz, 3 A per phase

Steam: Pressure – 50 to 80 psig (3.45 to 5.52 bar), dynamic, condensate free, and 97 percent to100 percent vapor qualityConsumption – 185 lbs/hr (84 kg/hour)Peak Flow – 335 lbs/hr (152 kg/hour)Size – 1" NPT

Water: Pressure – 20 to 50 psig (1.38 to 3.45 bar), dynamicConsumption – 130 gal/hr (495 L/hour)Peak Flow – 15 gal/min (57 L/min)Size – 1" NPT

Operating 26 x 37.5 x 36" (660 x 950 x 910 mm) 3800 lb (1720 kg)Weight: 26 x 37.5 x 48" (660 x 950 x 1220 mm) 4200 lb (1900 kg)

26 x 37.5 x 60" (660 x 950 x 1520 mm) 4700 lb (2125 kg)

ENGINEERING DATA

NOTES:Operating weight includes a full load in the chamber.Water consumption data is based on running one fully loaded Prevac cycle per hour and the machine idling for the remainderof the hour.

B

471

(1194)

381

(965)53.5

(1359)

362

(914)

362

(914)

302

(762)

75.25, Typical(1911)

44(1118)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

Single Hinged-Door, Cabinet Enclosed

POWERPOWER

ONON OFF

OFF

VP

ECFW S

A

471

(1194)

381

(965)

302

(762)

75.25, Typical(1911)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

Single Hinged-Door, Recessed, One Wall

OFF

OFF

ONON

POWERPOWER

VP

EC SFW

D D

Dimensions are inches (millimeters).Dimensions are inches (millimeters).Dimensions are inches (millimeters).Dimensions are inches (millimeters).Dimensions are inches (millimeters).

1 Service Clearance2 Door Swing (left hand swing shown)3 Wall Opening

383

(965)44

(1118)

362

(914)

362

(914)

75.253, Typical(1911)

7

POWERPOWER

ONON OFF

OFF

C

53.5(1359)

362

(914)

362

(914)

302

(762)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

Double Hinged-Door, Recessed, Two Walls

VP

EC SFW

NOTE: Because of STERIS's continuing program of research anddevelopment, all specifications and descriptions are subject to change withoutnotice. Some options may affect utility consumptions. Obtain certifieddrawings for design and installation.

Recommended Feed Water Quality for Sterilizers

Condition Nominal Conditions Maximum Conditions

Temperature 40°-60°F (4°-16°C) 70°F (21°C)

Total Hardness as CaCO3* 50-120 mg/L 171 mg/L

Total Dissolved Solids 100-200 mg/L 500 mg/L

Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 70-120 mg/L 180 mg/L

pH 6.8-7.5 6.5-8.5

Total Silica 0.1 - 1.0 mg/L 2.5 mg/L

WATER QUALITY RECOMMENDATIONS

Chamber Length36 48 60

(914) (1219) (1524)

A69 81 93

(1753) (2057) (2362)

B58 70 82

(1473) (1778) (2082)

C48 60 72

(1219) (1524) (1829)

D59 71 83

(1499) (1803) (2108)

E71.5 83.5 95.5

(1816) (2121) (2425)

F53.25 65.25 77.25(1352) (1657) (1962)

OVERALL INSTALLED LENGTHRefer To Illustrations.

Dimensions are inches (mm).

D

C

471

(1194)

381

(965) 362

(914)

302

(762)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

VP

ECFW S

D

362

(914)

53.5(1359)

POWERPOWER

ONON OFF

OFF

Double Hinged-Door, Recessed, One Wall


44(1118)

383

(965)

74.253

(1886)Typical

75.25(1911)Typical

383

(965)

471

(1194)

381

(965)

74.253

(1886)Typical


For further information, please contact:

STERIS Corporation5960 Heisley RoadMentor, OH 44060-1834 • USA440-354-2600 • 800-548-4873www.steris.com

SD724 ©2002, STERIS Corporation All rights reserved. MC (02/01/02)This data is intended for the exclusive use of STERIS customers, including

architects or designers. Reproduction in whole or in part by others is prohibited.

STERIS Offices WorldwideCanada 800 661 3937Germany 49 22 33 69990Hong Kong 852 2 563 3623Italy 39 01 41 590429Japan 81 78 321 2271Korea 82 2 517 1517Latin America 305 442 8202Singapore 65 841 7677Spain 34 91 658 5920United Kingdom 44 1256 840400

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

POWERPOWER

OF

FO

FF

ON

ON

POWERPOWER

381

(965)

521

(1321)

70(1778)

75.25(1778)

F

381

(965)

70(1778)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

75.25(1911)

F

Double Horizontal-sliding DoorRecessed, One Wall Recessed, Two Walls

VP

ECFW S

VP

ECFW S

DD


682

(1727)

74.252

(1886)Typical

74.252

(1886)Typical

521

(1321)

682

(1727)

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

POWERPOWER

OF

FO

FF

ON

ON

POWERPOWER

70(1778)

D

75.25(1778)

381

(965)

521

(1321)

70(1778)

75.25(1911)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

E

Single Horizontal-sliding DoorCabinet Enclosed Recessed

VP

ECFW S

VP

ECFW S

D D

74.252

(1778)Typical

682

(1727)

381

(965)

521

(1321)

1 Service Clearance2 Wall Opening

AMSCO® CENTURY TM

MEDIUM STEAM STERILIZERS 26" X 37.5" – SCIENTIFIC

• Sliding door with quiet, motor-drivencable and pulley mechanism. Poweroperated door travels horizontallyright to left to open and is controlledfrom the touch screen.

APPLICATIONThis sterilizer is offered in a Prevacuumconfiguration and is designed for fast,efficient sterilization of heat- andmoisture-stable materials in scientificapplications. Prevacuum configurationsterilizers are equipped with pre-vacuum, gravity, liquid, leak test, anddaily air removal (Bowie-Dick) testcycles.The 48" and 60" configurations includechoice of a single or a double door; 36"configuration provides single door,only.

DESCRIPTIONAmsco Century Medium SteamSterilizers are equipped with the latestfeatures in both state-of-the-arttechnology, and ease of use.

Primary Product FeaturesInterior Chamber Dimensions• 26 x 37.5 x 36" (660 x 950 x 910 mm)• 26 x 37.5 x 48" (660 x 950 x 1220 mm)• 26 x 37.5 x 60" (660 x 950 x 1520 mm)The sterilizer can be ordered with oneof two door configurations:

• Hinged door with fast operating, low-effort door lock mechanism. Manualdoor handle lock lever requires asingle 30° handle movement to lockor unlock.

The Selections Checked Below Apply To This Equipment

SD744 (05/01/02)

(Typical only–some details may vary.)

ItemLocation(s)

SIZE❏ 26 x 37.5 x 36" (660 x 950 x 914 mm)❏ 26 x 37.5 x 48" (660 x 950 x 1219 mm)❏ 26 x 37.5 x 60" (660 x 950 x 1524 mm)

STEAM SOURCE❏ Building Steam

VACUUM PUMP ELECTRIC SERVICE❏ 208/240 VAC, 60 Hz, 3-Phase, 6A/Phase❏ 480 VAC, 60 Hz, 3-Phase, 3A/Phase

DOOR CONFIGURATION❏ Single-door

❏ Hinged❏ Horizontal-slidingSelect direction of door swing or movement,as viewed from Operating End of sterilizer:

❏ Left-hand❏ Right-hand (not available for sliding-door

units)

ACCESSORIES❏ 36" (914 mm) Chamber Length❏ 48" (1219 mm) Chamber Length❏ 60" (1524 mm) Chamber Length

❏ Loading Car❏ Transfer Carriage❏ Chamber Track Assembly ❏ Single Door ❏ Double Door❏ Loading Car, Transfer Carriage, and Track

Assembly ❏ Single Door ❏ Double Door

❏ (36" Units, only) Chamber Rack and Shelf❏ Seismic Tie-down Kit

❏ Double-door*❏ Hinged DoorNOTE: Operating end hinge position listed first;non-operating end hinge listed second.

❏ Right-hand/Left-hand❏ Right-hand/Right-hand❏ Left-hand/Right-hand❏ Left-hand/Left-hand

❏ Horizontal-sliding DoorNOTE: Operating end slide direction listed first;non-operating end slide direction listedsecond.

❏ Right-hand/Left-hand

SINGLE-DOOR MOUNTING❏ Cabinet Enclosed/Freestanding❏ Recessed

DOUBLE-DOOR MOUNTING❏ Recessed through One Wall❏ Recessed through Two Walls

Hinged Door Model Horizontal-sliding DoorModel

* 26 x 37.5 x 36" sterilizers not available indouble-door configuration.

OPTIONS❏ Pure Steam Piping❏ RTD Load Probe and F0 Sterilization

❏ Bio-Seal (double door units only)❏ Air Differential Seal (double door units only)❏ Eighteen-cycle Capability❏ 3" Tri-clamp Penetration❏ Integral Electric Steam Generator

2

Century control system with en-hanced functionality, and user-friendlyinterface screen.• Touch-sensitive screen with 30-line x

40-character display area.• Ink-on-paper impact printer.• Help screens for programming and

troubleshooting alarm conditions.• Standard communication interface

with most PC-compatible peripheraldevices (e.g., disk drives, printers).

• Automatic check of control programand cycle data maintains processintegrity.

• Vacuum pump is supplied on allunits to effectively pull chamber tospecified vacuum levels, as well asreduce water consumption.

STANDARDSEach sterilizer meets applicablerequirements of the following listingsand standards, and carries theappropriate symbols:• EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC, 92/31/

EEC, 93/68/EEC.• Low Voltage Directive: 72/23/EEC,

93/68/EEC.• Machine Directive: 89/392/EEC,

91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC, 93/68/EEC.• Pressure Equipment Directive:

97/23/EC.• Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

Standard 3101 as certified by ETLTesting Laboratories, Inc.

• Canadian Standards Association(CSA) Standard C22.2, No. 1010.

• ASME Code, Section VIII, Division1 for unfired pressure vessels. Thepressure vessel is so stamped;ASME Form U-1 is furnished. Shelland door are constructed to with-stand working pressure of 45 psig(3.1 bar).

FEATURES26 x 37.5 chamber cross-sectionallows for efficient, high-volumesterilization processing.

Lighted DIN connectors are installedon all steam, water, and exhaust valvesfor reliability and ease of maintenance.

PROCESSING CYCLESSterilizer is factory-programmed withthe following applicable sterilizingcycles:• Gravity Cycle – for the sterilization of

heat- and moisture-stable goods at100° to 137°C (212° to 279°F), anddecontamination of bagged basiclaboratory wastes. Gravity cycleutilizes the gravity air-displacementprinciple.

• Liquid Cycle – for the sterilization ofliquids and media in vented borosili-cate glass or metal containers at100° to 123°C (212° to 254°F). Liquidcycle utilizes the optimal solutioncooling feature, during exhaust(cooling) phase, to control theexhaust rate.

• Prevacuum Cycle – for efficient,high-volume sterilization of porous,heat- and moisture-stable materialsat 121° to 137°C (250° to 279°F).Prevacuum cycle utilizes a mechani-cal air-evacuation system.

TESTING CYCLES• Vacuum Leak Test – This cycle is

used for testing the vacuum integrityof the sterilizer’s piping. Sterilizerchamber must be empty whilerunning this test cycle. All timing ispreprogrammed and cannot beadjusted.

• DART (Bowie-Dick) Test Cycle –This cycle is used to conduct aBowie-Dick test on the sterilizer.Recommended load is a STERISDart® pack, or a properly preparedBowie-Dick test pack. Sterilizeexposure temperature: 270°F(132°C); sterilize exposure time:3-1/2 minutes; dry time: 1 minute.

Fast-operating, low-effort manualdoor lock mechanism (hinged-doormodels) allows door to be locked orunlocked, using a single 30° handlemotion.Power Horizontal-sliding Door –control panel operated horizontal-sliding door is available in left-hand,single- or double-door models.Resistive Thermal Devices (RTD) areinstalled for sterilizer temperaturecontrol. The dual element chamberdrain line RTD senses and controlstemperature variations within thesterilizer chamber. A jacket RTDprovides temperature control within thejacket space. These RTD signals,converted into electrical impulses,provide accurate control inputs andreadouts throughout entire cycle.Electronic water saving controlincludes a condenser RTD to controlthe amount of water used in condens-ing the exhausted chamber steam.Software calibration is performed inthe Service Mode, accessible throughthe touch screen displays, andaccomplished using external or internaltemperature and pressure sources.Control system provides printed recordof all calibration data for verification tocurrent readings.Automatic utilities startup/shutdownpermits slow cooling of the entirevessel and load. Shutdown may beprogrammed to activate at the end ofany designated cycle or time of day.When activated, control systemautomatically shuts off all utility valves,conserving steam and water usage.Sterilizer utilities can be restarted eitherby programmed time or manualoperation. A different shutdown andrestart time can be programmed foreach day.Steam purge feature is provided toassist in air removal and preheat theload.Two-piece insulation sleeve is fittedaround exterior of the sterilizer vessel.The sleeve is sealed and held in placeby hook-and-loop closures. Insulationis asbestos- and chloride-free, siliconeimpregnated, oil- and water-resistantfiberglass.

3

CONTROL SYSTEMDesign FeaturesCentury control system monitors andcontrols all sterilizer operations andfunctions. The control system isfactory-programmed with standardsterilizing cycles. Each cycle isadjustable to meet specific process-ing requirements. All control configur-ing is performed through the touchscreen displays.IMPORTANT: If factory-programmedcycle values are changed, it isnecessary for the operator to validatethe efficacy of the changed cycle.Cycle values and operating featuresmay be adjusted and verified prior tocycle operation. Once cycle is started,cycles and cycle values cannot bechanged until the cycle is complete.On completion of the cycle, timersreset to the previously selected values,eliminating the need to reset valuesbetween repeated cycles. If chambertemperature drops below set pointduring the exposure phase, the timer isset to stop and automatically resetonce normal operating temperature isreached.Critical control system components arehoused within a sealed compartment toprotect the components from moistureand heat generated during the steril-ization process. A cooling fan with filteris installed in the housing compartmentto maintain positive pressure within thecompartment, keeping componentscool and dust-free.Operator interface control panel,consisting of a touch screen andimpact printer, is located on theoperating (i.e., load or nonsterile) endof the sterilizer. If the sterilizer isequipped with double doors, anadditional touch screen is provided onthe sterilizer's non-operating (i.e.,unload or sterile) end.• Touch-sensitive Screen features a

30-line x 40-character graphicsdisplay. All sterilizer functions,including cycle initiation and cycleconfiguration, are operated bypressing the touch-sensitive areason the display, referred to as "touch

pads." Display indicates appropriatecontrol buttons, operator prompts,and status messages necessary toassist in sterilizer operation. Alldisplayed messages are completephrases with no codes to be cross-referenced. Display also indicatesany abnormal conditions that mayexist either in or out of a cycle.

• Ink-on-paper Impact Printer,located above touch screen,provides an easy-to-read printedrecord of all pertinent cycle data on2-1/4" (57 mm) wide paper. Data isautomatically printed at the begin-ning and end of each cycle and attransition points during the cycle.Printer take-up spool stores an entireroll of paper, providing cycle recordswhich can be saved for future refer-ence. Three paper tape rolls are fur-nished with each unit.

Non-Operating End (NOE) ControlPanel, equipped on double-doorsterilizers only, includes a touch-sensitive screen similar to the operat-ing end screen. Preprogrammedcycles can be started from the NOEcontrol panel. Display concurrentlyshows the same information as theoperating end screen display.Cycle Configuration is performed byaccessing the Change Values menuthrough the operating end touchscreen. In addition to adjustment ofcycle values, the following operatingparameters can also be changedthrough the Change Values menu:• Time Display and Printout Units –

Standard AM/PM or 24-hour military(MIL).

Prevac Configuration Sterilizer

OPTIONS

1S T E R I S S C I E N T I F I C

STERILIZER PREPARED FOR:

STERIS SCIENTIFICCUSTOMER

** Not For Patient Use **MAIN MENU

CYCLESELECT

OPENDOOR

CLOSEDOOR

• Access Code – requires entry of afour-digit access code to operatethe sterilizer and/or change thecycle values. Operating thesterilizer, or accessing ChangeValues menu, causes display torequest the entry of an accesscode. If the access code is notproperly entered, display returns tothe standby or main menu screen,denying user access to thesterilizer or programming.

• Audible Signals are adjustable.Touch pad and end-of-cyclesignals can be adjusted to one of

four sound levels (off, low, medium,or high) as required for the operatingenvironment. Alarm signal can beadjusted to low, medium, or high (itcannot be turned off).

• Print Format – allows selection ofeither a full or condensed printout ofthe cycle information duringprocessing.

• Temperature Display and PrintoutUnits – Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius(°C). Temperature is set, displayed,controlled, and printed to the nearest1°. Recalibration is not requiredwhen changing temperature unitsfrom °F to °C, and vice versa.

• Pressure/Vacuum Display andPrintout Units – psig/In Hg or bar.Recalibration is not required whenchanging pressure units.

Technical DataControl system consists of microcom-puter control boards and peripheralfunction circuit boards, located withinthe control column PC board housing.An internal battery backs up all cyclememory for up to 10 years. If a powerfailure occurs during a cycle, thebattery backup system assures thatcycle memory will be retained, andproper cycle completion will occuronce power is restored. When power islost, the cycle is held in phase untilpower is restored, exceeding theminimum government specification of 1minute. Once power returns, the eventis recorded on the printout, and thecycle automatically resumes or

4

restarts, depending on what phase thecycle was in at the time of power loss.If necessary, the operator can manu-ally abort the cycle.

SAFETY FEATURESControl Lockout Switch – equippedon chamber door, senses when thedoor seal is energized, and is tightagainst the door. Control prevents thecycle from starting until the limit switchsignal is received. If the control losesthe appropriate signal during the cycle,the alarm activates, the cycle aborts,and the chamber safely vents with acontrolled exhaust.Chamber Float Switch – activates thealarm, aborts the cycle, and safelyvents the chamber with a controlledexhaust if excessive condensate isdetected in the vessel chamber.Pressure Relief Valve – limits theamount of pressure buildup so that therated pressure in the vessel is notexceeded.

CONSTRUCTIONShell AssemblyTwo fabricated Type 316L stainless-steel shells, welded one within theother, form the sterilizer vessel. Type316L stainless-steel end frame(s) iswelded to door end. On single doorunits, back of chamber is fitted withwelded, 316L stainless-steel dishedhead.Sterilizer vessel is ASME rated at45 psig (3.1 bar) and insulated. Vesselincludes one 1"-NPT welded chamberbushing for customer use.Steam-supply opening inside thechamber is shielded by a stainless-steel baffle.

Chamber Door(s)Door is constructed of Type 316Lstainless steel.During cycle operation, door is sealedby a steam-activated door seal. Doorseal is constructed of a special long-life rubber compound. When thesterilizer cycle is complete, the sealretracts under vacuum into a machinedgroove in the sterilizer's end frame.

A proximity switch is used by thecontrol to determine if the door isclosed. An additional seal pressureswitch prevents inadvertent cycleinitiation if the door is not sealed.The door assembly is equipped with amechanical locking mechanism thatprevents the door from opening, aslong as the seal is intact and ener-gized, and more than 2 psi (0.14 bar)pressure is in the chamber.The sterilizer door is fitted with astainless-steel panel that insulates theoperator from the chamber end ring,lessening the chance of accidentalcontact with a hot metal surface.

Chamber Drain SystemDrain system is designed to preventpollutants from entering into the water-supply system and sterilizer. Theautomatic condensing system, consist-ing of a stainless-steel plate-typecondenser, converts chamber steam tocondensate, and disposes condensateto waste. Cooling water flow is regu-lated by the waste line RTD to minimizewater usage. Water supply shutoffvalve is located in the recessed area ofthe unit (see illustrations on pages 7and 8).

Vacuum SystemVacuum pump reduces chamberpressure during prevacuum and post-drying phases. Air is drawn from thechamber through the vacuum system.Following dry phase, chamber vacuumis relieved to atmospheric pressure byadmitting air through a bacteria-retentive filter.

Steam SourceSterilizers are piped, valved, andtrapped to receive building-suppliedsteam delivered at 50 to 80 psig (3.5 to5.6 bar) dynamic. Steam piping isconstructed of brass, and includes ashutoff valve, steam strainer, and abrass pressure regulator.

PipingAll piping connections terminate withinthe confines of the sterilizer, and areaccessible from front and side ofsterilizer.

• Solenoid Valves with DIN connec-tors simplify sterilizer piping, andcan be serviced individually.

• Manual Shutoff Valves are pressurerated at 125 psig (8.62 bar) forsaturated steam. Valve handles arelow-heat conducting.

MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTSterilizers are arranged for eitherfreestanding or recessed installation,as specified. (For double-door mount-ing, the recessed installation can bethrough one wall or two walls.) Eachsterilizer is height-adjustable. Sterilizersubframe is equipped with a syntheticrubber gasket to support a tight fitbetween the cabinet panels onfreestanding units, or between the frontcabinet panel and wall partition onrecessed units.On freestanding units, stainless-steelside panels and a louvered top panelenclose the sterilizer body and piping.

OPTIONSPure Steam Piping – delivers steam,generated from customer purifiedwater source, to the chamber, and itscontents. All steam-to-chamber pipingcomponents are constructed of 300series stainless steel.RTD Load Probe and F0 Steriliza-tion – automatically senses the loadtemperature during cycle operation. Asingle thermal load probe is sealedthrough the sterilizer vessel, andmanually placed in the productcontainer, within the chamber, prior tocycle operation.In conjunction with the load probeoption, individual cycles can be set tostart exposure phase according tochamber drain temperature, oraccording to load temperature. Also, F0set points are available for each cycle,allowing for exposure phase termina-tion based on the calculated F0 value.Bio-Seal (Double Door units only) –provided on the non-operating end ofthe sterilizer, prevents passage ofairborne microorganisms from thespace between the vessel body andthe structural wall opening.

5

Air Differential Seal (Double Doorunits only) – provided on the non-operating end of the sterilizer, preventspassage of vermin from nonsterile areato the sterile area.Eighteen-Cycle Capability – providesan additional 12 cycles to the controlsystem memory, for a total of 18cycles.3" Tri-Clamp Penetration – permitsinsertion of temperature probes, suchas thermocouples or resistive thermaldevices (RTD), into the chamber. Theassembly includes a stainless-steelthreaded clamp, seal, and seat toaccept a maximum of 12 customer-supplied probes.Integral Electric Steam Generator –An optional 45 kW steam generator isavailable for this sterilizer. The genera-tor is manufactured of carbon orstainless steel, and is positionedbeneath the sterilizer. Additional floorspace, either at the rear of the sterilizer(single door chamber), or at the side(double door chamber) is required.Additional utility requirements are alsoneeded. Refer to the appropriateequipment drawings if an integralsteam generator is required.

ACCESSORIESSeismic Tie-down Kit – conforms toTitle 24 California Code of Regulations,1993 Amendment Section 2336(B).Material Handling Accessories –include stainless-steel chamber tracksand stainless-steel loading cars withpainted-steel carriages. Stainless-steelchamber rack and shelf are availablefor 36" (914mm) sterilizers. Seeseparate product literature for details.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCEA global network of skilled servicespecialists can provide periodicinspections, and adjustments to assurelow-cost peak performance. STERISrepresentatives can provide informa-tion regarding Annual MaintenanceAgreements.

NOTESRefer to equipment drawing for fullinformation.1. The sterilizer is not supplied with a

vacuum breaker or backflowpreventer and, where required bylocal codes, installation of such adevice in water line is by others.

2. Pipe sizes shown indicate terminaloutlets only. Building service lines,provided by others, must supply thespecified pressures and flow rates.

3. Disconnect switches (with OFFposition lockout only; by others)should be installed in electric supplylines near the equipment.

4. Access to the recessing area fromthe control end of the sterilizer isrecommended.

5. Clearances shown are minimal forinstalling and servicing the equip-ment.

6. Depending on the loading equip-ment used, additional clearance isrequired:• If shelves are used, length of

sterilizer plus 24" (610 mm) ateach door.

• If loading car and carriage will beused, twice the length of sterilizerat each door.

7. Floor drain should be provided withinconfines of sterilizer framework.

UTILITY REQUIREMENTSDrain (D)

2" ODT drain terminal (floor draincapacity must handle peak waterconsumption)

ElectricControl (EC) Domestic120 V, 1-phase, 60 Hz, 2 A

ElectricControl (EC) International230 V, 50 Hz, 1-phase, 1.5 A

Electric Control, Vacuum Pump (VP)Domestic

480 V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 3 A perphase, ororororor208/240 V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 6 A perphase

Electric Control, Vacuum Pump (VP)International

400 V, 50 Hz, 3-phase, 4 A perphase

Steam (S)Pressure – 50 to 80 psig (3.45 to5.52 bar, dynamic), condensate free,and 97% to 100% vapor qualityConsumption – 185 lbs/hr (84 kg/hour)Peak Flow – 335 lbs/hr (152 kg/hour)Size – 1" NPT

Sterilizer Feedwater (FW)Pressure – 20 to 50 psig (1.38 to3.45 bar), dynamicConsumption – 130 gal/hr (495 L/hour)Peak Flow – 15 gal/min (57 L/min)Size – 1" NPT

NOTE: Backflow prevention is byothers; not supplied on unit.

. . . CHECK LOCAL CODES . . .

6

362

(914)

ENGINEERING DATA

NOTES:Operating weight includes a full load in the chamber.Water consumption data is based on running one fully loaded Prevac cycle per hour and the machine idling for the remainder of the hour.

B

53.5(1359)

362

(914)

362

(914)

302

(762)

75.25(1911)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

Single Hinged-Door, Cabinet Enclosed

POWERPOWER

ON OFF

OFF

VPECFW S


A

381

(965)

302

(762)

75.25(1911)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

Single Hinged-Door, Recessed, One Wall

OFF

ON

POWERPOWER

VPEC SFW

D D

362

(914)


44(1118)

471

(1194)

383

(965)44

(1118)

74.25, Typical3(1911)

381

(965)

471

(1194)

Drain: 2" ODT drain terminal (floor drain capacity must handle peak water consumption)

Electric:• USA: Control: 120 volt, 1-phase, 60 Hz, 2 A.

Vacuum Pump: 208/240 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz, 6 A per phase, ororororor480 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz, 3 A per phase.

• UK: Control: 230 volt, 1-phase, 50 Hz, 1.5 A.Vacuum Pump: 400 volt, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 6 A per phase.

• International: Control: 230 volt, 1-phase, 50 Hz, 1.5 A. (Outside UK) Vacuum Pump: 400 volt, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 4 A per phase.

Steam: Pressure – 50 to 80 psig (3.45 to 5.52 bar, dynamic), condensate free, and 97 percent to 100percent vapor qualityConsumption – 185 lb/hr (84kg/hour)Peak Flow – 335 lb/hr (152 kg/hour)Size – 1" NPT

Water: Pressure – 20 to 50 psig (1.38 to 3.45 bar), dynamicConsumption – 130 gal/hr (495 L/hr)Peak Flow – 15 gal/min (57 L/min)Size – 1" NPT

Operating 26 x 37.5 x 36" (660 x 950 x 914 mm) 3800 lb (1720 kg)Weight: 26 x 37.5 x 48" (660 x 950 x 1219 mm) 4200 lb (1900 kg)

26 x 37.5 x 60" (660 x 950 x 1524 mm) 4700 lb (2125 kg)

7

POWER

ON OFF

C

471

(1194)

381

(965)362

(914)

302

(762)

74.25, Typical3(1886)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

Double Hinged-Door, Recessed, One Wall

VPECFW S

POWERPOWER

ON OFF

C

471

(1194)

381

(965)

53.5(1359)

362

(914)

362

(914)

302

(762)

75.25(1911)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

74.25, Typical3(1886)

Double Hinged-Door, Recessed, Two Walls

VPEC SFW

NOTE: Because of STERIS's continuing program of research anddevelopment, all specifications and descriptions are subject to change withoutnotice. Some options may affect utility consumptions. Obtain certified drawingsfor design and installation.

WATER QUALITY RECOMMENDATIONS

Chamber Length36 48 60

(914) (1219) (1524)

A69 81 93

(1753) (2057) (2362)

B58 70 82

(1473) (1778) (2082)

C48 60 72

(1219) (1524) (1829)

D59 71 83

(1499) (1803) (2108)

E71.5 83.5 95.5

(1816) (2121) (2425)

F53.25 65.25 77.25(1352) (1657) (1962)

OVERALL INSTALLED LENGTHRefer To Illustrations.

Dimensions are: inches (mm).

D

D53.5(1359)

38(965)


44(1118)


44(1118)362

(914)

Recommended Feed Water Quality for Sterilizers

Condition Nominal Conditions Maximum Conditions

Temperature 40°-60°F (4°-16°C) 70°F (21°C)

Total Hardness as CaCO3* 50-120 mg/L 171 mg/L

Total Dissolved Solids 100-200 mg/L 500 mg/L

Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 70-120 mg/L 180 mg/L

pH 6.8-7.5 6.5-8.5

Total Silica 0.1 - 1.0 mg/L 2.5 mg/L

For further information, please contact:

STERIS Corporation5960 Heisley RoadMentor, OH 44060-1834 • USA440-354-2600 • 800-548-4873www.steris.com

SD744 ©2002, STERIS Corporation All rights reserved. MC (05/01/02)

OFF

OFF

ONON

POWERPOWER

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

POWERPOWER

381

(965)

521

(1321)

70(1778)

D

75.25(1778)

381

(965)

521

(1321)

70(1778)682

(1727)

75.25(1911)

4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

E

Single Horizontal-sliding DoorCabinet Enclosed Recessed

OFF

OFF

ONON

POWERPOWER

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

POWERPOWER

F 4-8(102-203)

Wall Thickness

F

Double Horizontal-sliding DoorRecessed, One Wall Recessed, Two Walls

VPECFW S

VPECFW S

VPECFW S

VPECFW S

D D

DD

74.25,Typical3(1886)

74.25,Typical3(1886)

1 Service Clearance2 Wall Opening


75.25(1911) 74.25,

Typical3(1886)

521

(1321)

381

(965)

68(1727)

70(1778)

381

(965)

521

(1321)

68(1727)

70(1778)

75.25(1911)

STERIS Offices WorldwideBenelux 32 2 523 2488Canada 800 661 3937France 33 14 488 2688Germany 49 22 33 69990Italy 39 02 66 80 53 10Japan 81 78 321 2271Latin America 305 442 8202Nordic 358 9 25851Singapore 65 68 41 7677Spain 34 91 658 5920Sweden 46 152 228 30United Kingdom 44 1256 840400

This data is intended for the exclusive use of STERIS customers, includingarchitects or designers. Reproduction in whole or in part by others is prohibited.

3-1764330-117

Section 3: Operating Instructions

3.1 BEFORE OPERATING THESTERILIZER

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Sterilizer, rack/shelves, and loading car will be hot after cycle isrun. Always wear protective gloves and apronwhen removing a processed load. Protectivegloves and apron must be worn when reloadingsterilizer following the previous operation.

WARNING–FALL HAZARD: To prevent falls,keep floors dry by immediately wiping up anyspilled liquids or condensation in sterilizer load-ing or unloading area.

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: If 0 (zero) dry timeis selected, steam vapors will be released whenopening door. Step back away from the door whenopening door. Door should only be opened 2-3inches until no more vapors are seen, beforeopening the door fully.

Operate sterilizer by referring to the appropriatecycle description in this section. The information incases 3.1 through 3.7 are general instructions thatapply to all cycle operations.

1. Press “ON” touch-screen pad on the sterilizer con-trol display.

• The printer records the time and date that thepower is turned ON.

2. Open chamber door.

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Strainer andchamber interior will be hot, use protectivegloves.

a. Check that drain strainer is clean and inplace and that chamber interior is clean. SeeSECTION 6.2, if cleaning is necessary.

b. Close chamber door.

3. Under normal operation utility supply valves re-main open. Verify valves are in OPEN position(see Figure 3-1). Valves are accessed from steril-izer equipment room and cannot be accessed fromthe operator side.

4. Open control access door.

a. Check printer paper roll.

• A colored warning stripe is visible when rollis near its end.

b. See “Changing Paper Roll” in SECTION 6.5, if anew paper roll is needed.

5. Run required test cycle:

» Run a DART (Bowie-Dick) test at least once a dayto document the removal of residual air fromsample challenge loads.

NOTE: Units configured to run SFPP cycles only, do notrequire daily running of DART (Bowie-Dick) cycles.

» Run a vacuum leak test at least once each weekto measure the integrity of the pressure vesseland associated piping. This test helps assurethat air is not being admitted to the sterilizerchamber during vacuum draw downs.

NOTE: Always run a warm-up cycle before runningthe daily DART (Bowie-Dick) test or weekly vacuumleak test.

Press “MORE CYCLES” to access the VacuumLeak Test and DART (Bowie-Dick) cycle selec-tor touch-screen pads. For instructions on run-ning these tests, refer to cycle descriptions laterin this section. Refer also to SECTION 3, TECH-NIQUES OF STERILIZATION, in the Operator Manual.

6. Once these tests have been run (if necessary), pro-ceed to loading the sterilizer and running cycles.

Figure 3-1. Utility Supply Valves

Water Valve(Below Chamber)

Steam Valve (AboveChamber)

ValveHandle Valve

Handle

3-2764330-117

Table 3-1. Factory-Set Cycles and Cycle Values

Prevacuum Sterilizer Cycles and Cycle Values (Table 3-1A)



2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 20 MIN. Double-wrapped instrument trays, max. ST-8weight of 17 lbs (7.7 kg) each. Fabric packs.Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.



Steam Flush Pressure-Pulse Sterilizer Cycles and Cycle Values (Table 3-1B)







Test Cycles Sterilize Sterilize Dry Recommended Validationfor All Units Temp. Time Time Load Standard5. Leak Test5. Leak Test5. Leak Test5. Leak Test5. Leak Test11111 270°F (132°C) N/A N/A N/A ST-8

6. DART Test6. DART Test6. DART Test6. DART Test6. DART Test11111 270°F (132°C) 3-1/2 MIN. 1 MIN. DARTor Bowie-Dick ST-8Test Pack

7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up7. DART Warm-up11111 270°F (132°C) 3 MIN. 1 MIN. N/A N/A

1 Not adjustable.

3-3764330-117



00:00:00 AM 00/00/00


TEMP ............ 98° F 1PRESS .......... 0.00 psigSTATUS ....... DOOR OPEN

1 2 3 4WRAP/SFPP SFPP PREVAC GRAVITY

270 F 270 F 270 F 250 FS= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 4:00 S= 30:00D= 20:00 D= 20:00 D= 20:00 D= 15:00

00:00:00 AM 00/00/00


Prevacuum SterilizerMenu Screen

Steam Flush Pressure PulseSterilizer Menu Screen

Cycle SelectionTouch Pads

Table 3-3. Liquid Cycle Processing GuidelinesMinimum Recommended

Number of Volume of Liquid Sterilize Time at 250°F (121°C)Containers in One Container in minutes

3 1000 mL 45

Table 3-2. Recommended Loads by Sterilizer Size 1

Wrapped FabricInstrument Trays Packs

2626262626 xxxxx 37.537.537.537.537.5 xxxxx 36" (66036" (66036" (66036" (66036" (660 xxxxx 950950950950950 xxxxx 910910910910910 mm)mm)mm)mm)mm) 9 18



1 Refer to Tables 3-1A and 3-1B to determine cycle use guidelines.

3-4764330-117

3.2 PREPARING LOADS FORSTERILIZATION CYCLES

Before sterilization, all materials must be thoroughlycleaned.

The Amsco® Century® Medium Steam Sterilizer cham-ber holds commonly used wrapped or unwrappedinstruments and equipment.

1. Wrappers may be made of 100% cotton, 140 threadcount, two-ply fabric, and must be laundered;alternatively, use commercially available, non-woven disposable wrappers.

2. Limit the size and density of each muslin pack.[Maximum size: 12 x 12 x 20" (305 x 305 x 508mm); Maximum weight: 12 lbs (5.4 kg). No packshould have a density in excess of 7.2 lbs/ft3 (115kg/m3).] This ensures complete steam penetra-tion, and minimizes moisture retention.

3. Limit the weight of wrapped instrument sets to17 lbs (7.7 kg) to minimize moisture retention.

4. Limit the weight of basin sets to 7 lbs (3.2 kg).

3.3 GUIDELINES FOR PLACEMENTOF VARIOUS LOADS


Refer to AAMI ST-46 for load placement guidelines.

1. Open the sterilizer chamber door.

NOTE: If a cycle has been run, sterilizer and shelves orloading car may be hot.

NOTE: Wear clean gloves and use clean towels as “potholders” when carefully placing the load/tray(s) on thechamber shelves or loading car.

2. Place all packs on edge, and arrange load to allowfor maximum steam exposure so that there isminimal resistance for steam passage through theload.

3. Place utensils and treatment trays on their edgesso that they will be sterilized and properly dried.

4. Place instrument sets in trays that have a perfo-rated or mesh bottom. Place flat for sterilization.

5. In mixed loads of fabrics and hard goods, placethe hard goods on lower shelf. This reduces wet-ting of fabric packs from condensate drippingfrom a hard goods load.

6. DO NOT OVERLOAD STERILIZER. Allow forsteam penetration between packs. Avoid contactof load components with the wall of the chamber.

WARNING–PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD:When closing the chamber door, keep hands andarms out of the door opening and make sureopening is clear of any obstructions.

7. After placing load in chamber, close the chamberdoor. The sterilizer is now ready to run a cycle.Proceed to appropriate cycle description in thissection.

8. Materials capable of holding water, such as solid-bottomed pans, basins and trays, should be posi-tioned so that they are oriented in the same direc-tion and so that condensate can be eliminated.

IMPORTANT: Refer to SECTION 3, TECHNIQUES OF

STERILIZATION, in the sterilizer Operators Manual, foradditional information regarding pack preparation,loading and placement.

3.4 UNLOADING THE STERILIZER

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Sterilizer andshelves will be hot after cycle is run. Alwayswear protective gloves and apron when remov-ing a processed load.

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Steam may bereleased from the chamber when door is opened.Step back from the sterilizer each time the dooris opened to minimize contact with steam vapor.


At the end of a cycle, when end-of-cycle tone soundsand display shows:

TEMP ............ 200 F 1PRESS .......... 00 psigSTATUS ....... COMPLETE 00:00:00 AMCYCLE .......... 4, PREVAC, 270F, S=4:00, D= 20:00

OPEN DOOR & UNLOAD CHAMBER

PAPER DUPLICATEFEED PRINT

OPEN CLOSEDOOR DOOR

. . . open the chamber door.

NOTE: Wear clean gloves and use clean towels as “potholders” when carefully removing load/tray(s) from thesterilizer shelves or loading car.

3-5764330-117

NOTE: Never place a sterilized tray on a solid shelf orcold surface. Once the tray has cooled, it can be placedon a wire shelf.

1. Remove the load from chamber shelf (shelves).Avoid unnecessary handling.

2. Visually check outside wrapper for dryness. Ifthere are water droplets or visible moisture onthe exterior of the package, or on the tape used tosecure it, the pack or instrument tray is consid-ered unacceptable.

3. To prevent condensation, transfer the load to asurface which is well-padded with fabric. Do notplace load on a cold surface. Be sure that noair conditioning or cold air vents are in closeproximity.

4. Remove packs or instrument trays from the pad-ded surface when they have reached ambient(room) temperature. Depending on the items andenvironment of the area, this may take a mini-mum of 1 hour.

IMPORTANT: After removing load(s) from thechamber, close the chamber door and keep the cham-ber door closed to minimize utility consumption.

3.5 LOADING CAR INSTRUCTIONS:LOADING

1. Open sterilizer door.

2. Verify that loading car is securely fastened to thetransfer carriage.

3. Align the front end of the transfer carriage withthe end of the sterilizer. (See Figure 3-2).

4. Move carriage forward until latches engage withmating holes in chamber end frame.

5. Verify that transfer carriage is securely latchedby pulling transfer carriage backward (transfercarriage should remain stationary).

6. Once transfer carriage is securely latched, releasethe loading car from the transfer carriage bylifting the carriage lock.

7. Carefully push the loading car off the transfercarriage and fully into the sterilizer chamber.

8. Disengage transfer carriage latches from endframe by pushing carriage latch knob.

9. Back the transfer carriage away from the steril-izer.

10. Close the chamber door.

11. The sterilizer is now ready to run a cycle. Pro-ceed to appropriate cycle description found inSection 3 of this manual.

3.6 LOADING CAR INSTRUCTIONS:UNLOADING




2. Move transfer carriage forward until latches en-gage with track inside chamber.

3. Verify that transfer carriage is latched to chamberend ring by pulling transfer carriage backward(transfer carriage should remain stationary).

4. Once transfer carriage is securely latched, graspthe loading car handle and carefully pull loadingcar from chamber onto transfer carriage untiltransfer carriage latch engages to loading car.

5. Disengage transfer carriage latches from trackinside chamber by pushing carriage latch knob.

6. Close the chamber door.

7. Transfer load from sterilizer area.

Figure 3-2. Align Loading Car withChamber Opening

3-6764330-117

3.7 LOADING/UNLOADINGSTERILIZER: RACK AND SHELVES




If sterilizer is equipped with the rack and shelvesoption, refer to instructions below and Figure 3-3.


2. Transfer load to shelves in chamber. Shelves slideout halfway to facilitate loading.

3. After loading the shelves, slide them to closedposition to verify shelf does not interfere withdoor operation (both doors if double doorsterilizer).

4. Close chamber door(s).

5. The sterilizer is now ready to run a cycle. Refer toappropriate cycle description in Section 3 of thismanual.

6. Following successful completion of the steriliza-tion cycle, unload the sterilizer as follows:

a. Open chamber door.

b. Remove load from chamber.

c. Slide shelves into chamber, verifying that po-sition does not interfere with door operation.

d. Close chamber doors.

e. Transfer load to destination.

3.8 STERILIZER (FACTORY) CYCLESETTINGS

Amsco Century Medium Steam Sterilizers areshipped with the factory-set cycles and cycle valueslisted in Table 3-1A and 3-1B.

3.9 PREVACUUM STERILIZERCYCLES

Amsco Century Medium Prevacuum Sterilizers areshipped with the factory-set cycles listed in Table 3-1A.

Figure 3-3. Front Elevation Drawing of Loading Shelves

Middle Shelf

Lower Shelf

3-7764330-117

IMPORTANT: The sterilization cycles listed inTables 3-1A and 3-1B have been validated usingtechniques documented in AAMI ST-8. If differentcycle parameters (sterilize time and dry time only)other than those in Tables 3-1A and 3-1B arerequired, it is the responsibility of the healthcarefacility to validate the cycle. Reference AAMIguidelines/standards for a guide to validating ster-ilization cycles and to ensure that proper sterilityassurance level (SAL) as well as moisture retentionacceptance criteria are met.

Prevacuum Sterilizer Cycles and Cycle Values (Table 3-1A)



2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC2. PREVAC 270°F (132°C) 4 MIN. 20 MIN.1 Double-wrapped instrument trays, max. ST-8weight of 17 lbs (7.7 kg) each. Fabric packs.Refer to Table 3-2 for recommended quantities.



* Five minute Dry Time can be used for processing a single fabric pack.

Steam Flush Pressure-Pulse Sterilizer Cycles and Cycle Values (Table 3-1B)







3.10 SFPP STERILIZER CYCLES

Amsco Century Medium SFPP Steam Sterilizers areshipped with the factory-set cycles listed in Table 3-1B.

NOTE: The 270°F Prevacuum cycle described in sec-tion 3.11, and the 250°F Gravity Cycle described insection 3.12, are common to both SFPP and Prevacuumconfiguration sterilizers.

NOTE: Contact STERIS for information on a wide rangeof education/training programs designed to meet theeducational needs of healthcare industries.

3-8764330-117

3.11 PREVAC CYCLE 270°F (132°C)




The 270°F (132°C) cycle is used for sterilizing double-wrapped instrument trays or fabric packs.

1. Refer to “Before Operating the Sterilizer” (at thebeginning of this section) before running thiscycle.

2. See instructions for using the loading car/trans-fer carriage or rack and shelves, earlier in thissection, for procedures to load the sterilizer.

3. Press “PREVAC” touch-screen pad to start thePrevacuum cycle. Refer to Table 3-2 for descrip-tions of cycle use.

4. Sterilizer automatically progresses through cycle,as follows:

NOTE: If the wrong cycle has been selected, see“Aborting Cycle” in this section.

ACTIVATE SEAL — Steam enters the door seal,pressing it against inside surface of the door.

PURGE — Chamber is purged with steam. Start ofCondition is printed.

NOTE: Countdown timer on the display is estimated;timer self-corrects estimated time at the beginning ofeach phase.

PRESSURE/VACUUM PULSES #1 – #4 — Vacuumpoint is printed and pressure/vacuum pulse is re-peated.

CHARGE — Chamber is charged with steam. Startof steam charge is printed.

STERILIZE — Start of sterilize exposure is printedwhen the chamber reaches sterilization tempera-ture. Chamber temperature is printed every minute.

FAST EXHAUST — Start of exhaust is printed andchamber is exhausted to 4 psig.

DRY — Start of dry is printed and display countsdown dry time remaining.

AIR BREAK — Chamber is returned to atmosphericpressure.

RETRACT SEAL — A vacuum is drawn on the seal,retracting it from inner surface of door.

TEMP ................. 210 F 4PRESS ............. 14 psigSTATUS ............ PURGE 1:00CYCLE .............. 1, PREVAC, 270F, S= 4:00, D= 5:00

PROJECTED CYCLE COMPLETION TIME:

37:15MINUTES SECONDS

PAPER PRINTFEED STATUS

ABORT

00:00:00 AM 00/00/00




TEMP ................. 272.1 F 4PRESS ............... 29.4 psigSTATUS ............ STERILIZE 3:29CYCLE ............... 1, PREVAC, 270F, S= 4:00, D= 20:00




ABORT

3-9764330-117

TEMP ................. 128 F 5PRESS ............... 0.00 psigSTATUS ............ COMPLETE 00:00:00CYCLE ............... 1, PREVAC, 270F, S= 4:00, D= 20:00



TEMP ................. 210 F 4PRESS ............... 26.6 inHgSTATUS ............ DRY 4:45CYCLE ............... 1, PREVAC, 270F, S= 4:00, D= 20:00


5:15MINUTES SECONDS


ABORT

COMPLETE — Complete tone sounds. Cycle sum-mary and end of cycle messages are printed.



5. Unload sterilizer (see instructions for using theloading car/transfer carriage or rack and shelves,earlier in this section for procedures to removeload).

Figure 3-4. Typical Printout of a PrevacCycle

3-10764330-117

3.12 GRAVITY CYCLE




This cycle is used for sterilizing fabric packs.

1. Refer to “Before Operating the Sterilizer” (at thebeginning of this section) before running thiscycle.


3. To start the Gravity cycle, press the appropriate“GRAVITY” touch-screen pad. Refer to Table 3-1for descriptions of cycle use.




PURGE — Chamber is purged with steam. Start ofcondition is printed.









TEMP ................. 000 F 1PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ DOOR OPEN


00:00:00 AM 00-00-00


TEMP ................. 245 F 4PRESS ............... 16 psigSTATUS ............ CHARGECYCLE ............... 3, GRAVITY, 250F, S=30M, D=15M




ABORT

TEMP ................. 252 F 4PRESS ............... 19 psigSTATUS ............ STERILIZE 03:00CYCLE ............... 3, GRAVITY, 250F, S=30M, D=15M




ABORT

TEMP ................. 157 F 4PRESS ............... 27 inHgSTATUS ............ DRYCYCLE ............... 3, GRAVITY, 250F, S=30M, D=15M




ABORT

3-11764330-117

Figure 3-5. Typical Printout of a GravityCycle

TEMP ................. 123 F 5PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ COMPLETE 00:00:00 AMCYCLE ............... 3, GRAVITY, 250F, S=30M, D=15M






3-12764330-117

3.13 LIQUID CYCLE

WARNING–EXPLOSION HAZARD: This steril-izer is not designed to process flammable com-pounds.

WARNING–PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD:Avoid personal injury from bursting bottles. Liq-uid sterilization cycle must only be used forliquids in borosilicate (Pyrex) flasks with ventedclosures.

WARNING–PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD: Itis inappropriate for a healthcare facility to ster-ilize liquids for direct patient contact.

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: When sterilizingliquids, you must observe the following procedures:

• Use Liquid cycle only.• Use only vented closures.• Use only Type I borosilicate glass bottles.• Do not allow hot bottles to be jolted.


CAUTION: Sterilization of chloride-containingsolutions (e.g., saline) can cause chamber corro-sion and is not recommended by the manufacturer.If, however, chloride-containing solutions must beprocessed, clean the chamber after each use.

This cycle is used for sterilizing liquids in ventedclosures.

1. Refer to “Before Operating the Sterilizer” (at thebeginning of this section) before running this cycle.


3. Press “LIQUID” touch-screen pad to start the Liq-uid cycle.







STERILIZE — Start of sterilize exposure is printedwhen the chamber reaches sterilization tempera-ture. Chamber temperature is printed every 5 min-utes.

SLOW EXHAUST — Start of exhaust is printed andchamber is exhausted to 0 psig.



00:00:00 AM 00-00-00


TEMP ................. 210 F 4PRESS ............... 11 psigSTATUS ............ PURGE 00:57CYCLE ............... 4, LIQUID, 250F, S=45M


1:13HOURS MINUTES


ABORT

TEMP ................. 220 F 4PRESS ............... 13 psigSTATUS ............ CHARGECYCLE ............... 4, LIQUID, 250F, S=45M


1:12HOURS MINUTES


ABORT

TEMP ................. 252 F 4PRESS ............... 17 psigSTATUS ............ STERILIZE 03:00CYCLE ............... 4, LIQUID, 250F, S=45M




ABORT

3-13764330-117

SLOW EVACUATE — A vacuum is slowly drawnin the chamber to 5.0 inHg. This phase assures thatthe chamber is cooled to 208°F/95°C.

VAPOR REMOVAL — Filtered air enters the cham-ber to relieve the vacuum within the chamber.

RETRACT SEAL — Steam is exhausted from thedoor seal. For hinged door models, the door mustbe unlocked and opened slightly at this time, hori-zontal-sliding door models open automatically.(Chamber vapor vents through slight openingbetween seal and door, into the sterilizer cabinet for6 minutes.)


TEMP ................. 123 F 5PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ COMPLETE 00:00:00 AMCYCLE ............... 4, LIQUID, 250F, S=45M



TEMP ................. 252 F 4PRESS ............... 3 psigSTATUS ............ SLOW EXHAUSTCYCLE ............... 4, LIQUID, 250F, S=45M




ABORT

Figure 3-6. Typical Printout of a LiquidCycle




3-14764330-117

3.14 WRAP/SFPP CYCLE, 270°F (132°C)



WARNING–SLIPPING HAZARD: To preventfalls, keep floors dry by immediately wiping upany spilled liquids or condensation in sterilizerloading or unloading area.

The Wrap/SFPP cycle is designed to permit steril-ization of double-wrapped instrument trays (maxi-mum weight of 17 lbs [7.7 kg] each) of non-porousgoods only. This cycle conditions loads at above-atmospheric pressure. The Wrap/SFPP cycle con-sists of two steam flush pressure pulses with aSterilization time of 4 minutes at 270°F and a 20-minute Dry time.

NOTE: Make sure items are clean and free of soil.

1. Refer to “Before Operating the Sterilizer” (at thebeginning of this section) before runningthis cycle.


3. Press the WRAP/SFPP touch-screen pad to startthe WRAP/SFPP cycle. Refer to Table 3-1 for de-scriptions of cycle use.


NOTE: If the wrong cycle has been selected, see“Aborting Cycles” at the end of this section.

ACTIVATE SEAL — Steam enters the door seal,pressing it against inside surface of door.



STEAM FLUSH

PULSE #1 (and PULSE #2) — Pressure point isprinted and pressure pulse is repeated.







TEMP ................. 272 F 4PRESS ............... 30 psigSTATUS ............ STERILIZE 00:56CYCLE ............... 1, WRAP/SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M




ABORT



00:00:00 AM 00-00-00


TEMP ................. 210 F 4PRESS ............... 14 psigSTATUS ............ CHARGE 00:00CYCLE ............... 1, WRAP/SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M




ABORT

3-15764330-117


TEMP ................. 130 F 4PRESS ............... 27 inHgSTATUS ............ DRY 02:53CYCLE ............... 1, WRAP/SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M


4:18MINUTES SECONDS


ABORT

TEMP ................. 126 F 5PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ COMPLETE 00:00:00 AM

CYCLE ............... 1, WRAP/SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M





5. Unload sterilizer (see instructions for using theloading car/transfer carriage or rack and shelves,earlier in this section, for procedures to removeload).

Figure 3-6. Typical Printout — 270°F Wrap/SFPP Cycle

3-16764330-117

3.15 SFPP CYCLE, 270°F (132°C)




The SFPP cycle is designed for sterilizing fabricpacks. The cycle conditions load at above-atmosphericpressure. The SFPP cycle features three steam flushpressure pulses, a sterilization time of 4 minutes at270°F and a 20-minute dry time.

1. Refer to “Before Operating the Sterilizer” (at thebeginning of this section) before runningthis cycle.


3. Press the SFPP touch-screen pad to start theSFPP cycle. Refer to Table 3-1 for descriptions ofcycle use.


NOTE: If the wrong cycle has been selected, see“Aborting Cycles” at the end of this section.


STEAM FLUSH

PULSE #1 through PULSE #3 — Pressure point isprinted and pressure pulse is repeated.


TEMP ................. 210 F 4PRESS ............... 14 psigSTATUS ............ CHARGE 00:00CYCLE ............... 2, SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M




ABORT

TEMP ................. 000F 1PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ DOOR OPEN


00:00:00 AM 00-00-00


ACTIVATE SEAL — Steam enters the door seal, press-ing it against inside surface of door.


STERILIZE—Start of sterilize exposure is printedwhen the chamber reaches sterilization tempera-ture. Chamber temperature is printed every minute.

FAST EXHAUST—Start of exhaust is printed andchamber is exhausted to 4 psig.

DRY—Start of dry is printed and display countsdown dry time remaining.

TEMP ................. 272 F 4PRESS ............... 30 psigSTATUS ............ STERILIZE 00:56CYCLE ............... 2, SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M




ABORT

TEMP ................. 130 F 4PRESS ............... 27 inHgSTATUS ............ DRY 02:53CYCLE ............... 2, SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M


4:18MINUTES SECONDS


ABORT

3-17764330-117

AIR BREAK—Chamber is returned to atmosphericpressure.

RETRACT SEAL—A vacuum is drawn on the seal,retracting it from inner surface of door.

Figure 3-7. Typical Printout — 270°F SFPPCycle

TEMP ................. 126 F 5PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ COMPLETE 00:00:00 AM

CYCLE ............... 2, SFPP, 270F, S=04M, D=20M






5. Unload sterilizer (see instructions for using theloading car/transfer carriage or rack and shelves,earlier in this section, for procedures to removeload).

3-18764330-117

3.16 TEST CYCLES

3.16.1 DART (Bowie-Dick) Test



Test cycles are factory programmed on both thePrevacuum and SFPP Sterilizers.

The Dart® cycle provides the test cycle required tomeet the Bowie-Dick test cycle as specified by AAMI.Dart is an acronym for Daily Air Removal Test andcan be used interchangeably with Bowie-Dick inthis section.

This cycle is used to conduct a Bowie-Dick test onsterilizers that use prevacuum cycles. This test isonly applicable to sterilizers that use prevacuumcycles. Sterilizers configured to operate SFPP cyclesonly, do not requrie routine Bowie-Dick tesing.

AAMI ST-46 requires that a Bowie-Dick test cycle berun as the first cycle of the day each day the sterilizeris in use on a prevacuum sterilizer. The chambermust be at operating temperature when the Dart testcycle is performed. The Dart Warm-up cycle shouldbe completed prior to performing the Dart test cycle.

1. Refer to “Before Operating the Sterilizer” earlierin this section, and to SECTION 3, TECHNIQUES OF

STERILIZATION, to prepare the unit for runningthis cycle.

2. Press MORE CYCLES touch-screen pad at the cycleselection menu to access the second screen of cycles.Press Dart test touch-screen pad.

3. A second menu then appears on the screen. ADART test should only be run in a machine that isat operating temperature (that is, has run one ormore cycles). If the sterilizer has not run anycycles prior to the Dart test, run the DART WARM-UP cycle.

a. The operator is prompted to close the chamberdoor, if it is open. Once closed, the door sealsautomatically.

b. During "warm up," the sterilizer automaticallyruns a cycle with 3-minute sterilize and 1-minutedry values.

c. Once the Warm-up cycle is complete, the displayreturns to cycle select menu.

4. Open the chamber door (if it is not already open).Load the Dart (Bowie-Dick) test pack and closethe door.

5. Start the Dart test cycle. The cycle runs automati-cally, as follows:

ACTIVATE SEAL—Steam enters the door seal,pressing seal against inside surface of door.

PURGE—Chamber is purged with steam. Start ofcondition is printed.

PULSES #1 through PULSE #4—Vacuum point isprinted and pressure/vacuum pulse is repeated.

CHARGE—Chamber is charged with steam. Startof steam charge is printed.

STERILIZE—Start of sterilize exposure is printedwhen the chamber reaches set temperature. Cham-ber temperature is printed every minute. Chamberis controlled at set point plus overdrive.

FAST EXHAUST—Start of exhaust is printed andchamber is exhausted to 4 psig (0.28 Pbar).

DRY—Start of dry is printed and display countsdown dry time remaining.

AIR BREAK—Chamber is returned to atmosphericpressure.


COMPLETE—Complete tone sounds. Cycle sum-mary and end of cycle messages are printed.


LEAKDART DART TESTWARM-UP TEST

00:00:00 AM 00/00/00


MENU STANDBY

3-19764330-117



6. Once the cycle is complete:

a. Open the chamber door.

b. Unload the Dart test pack.

c. Forward the exposed Dart indicator to the ap-propriate personnel for examination.

Figure 3-8. Typical Printout of a Bowie-DickCycle

3-20764330-117

3.16.2 Vacuum Leak Test



This cycle is used for testing vacuum integrity of thesterilizer and piping.

A Vacuum Leak Test cycle should be run on thesterilizer at least once each week. It should be one ofthe first cycles run for the day, but not the first cycle.In this cycle, the sterilizer automatically checks forvacuum leaks in the piping and door seal. If thesterilizer fails the leak test, it must be inspected by aqualified service technician. (This test is not a sub-stitute for a Bowie-Dick test.) The Leak Test can alsobe used to confirm that the sterilizer piping is intactafter performing repairs.

NOTE: The measured leak rate (mm Hg per minute) iscalculated by the control over a timed 10-minute periodand is included in the cycle printout. A leak rate of 1 mmHg/minute or less is considered acceptable.

1. Before running Leak Test cycle, refer to “BeforeOperating the Sterilizer” (at the beginning of thissection).

NOTE: The sterilizer should be warm before runningthis test cycle. If no other cycle has been run on thesterilizer before the Leak Test, run a DART Warm Upcycle.

2. Press MORE CYCLES. The Leak Test cycle touch-screen pad appears on display.

3. To start the Leak Test, press the LEAK TEST touch-screen pad. Printer records cycle start. Cycle runsautomatically as follows:

NOTE: Cycle requires 30-35 minutes to complete.

ACTIVATE SEAL—Steam enters the door seal, press-ing seal against inside surface of door.

PURGE—Chamber is purged; printer records end ofpurge.

PULSE #1 (and PULSE #2)—Two vacuum and pres-sure pulses then occur and printer records each.

CHARGE—After the pressure pulses, temperaturerises to 270°F (132°C), unit begins to draw a vacuumfor 10 minutes. (Printer records temperature andpressure at beginning of 10-minute vacuum time.)

LEAK TEST/EVACUATING—Printer records tem-perature and vacuum at end of evacuation time.

LEAK TEST/STABILIZING—2-minute stabiliza-tion period begins after 10-minute evacuation iscompleted.

LEAK TEST—10-minute Leak Test period begins af-ter 2-minute stabilization is completed. Printer recordscalculated leak rate (mm Hg per minute) after 10-minute leak time.

AIR BREAK—Chamber is returned to atmosphericpressure, complete tone sounds and cycle summaryand end of cycle messages are printed.


COMPLETE—Complete tone sounds. Cycle sum-mary and end of cycle messages are printed.

4. Once the sterilizer completes and passes the leaktest, the unit can be used.

3-21764330-117

3.17 ABORTING CYCLES



It may be necessary to end a processing cycle, pos-sibly because the wrong cycle was selected or thesterilizer begins functioning incorrectly. A cycle canbe aborted at any time by pressing the ABORT touch-screen pad.

1. Touch the ABORT touch-screen pad.

• The status line on the display changes to “EX-HAUSTING CHAMBER”, if there is pressurein the chamber.

• The sterilizer exhausts the chamber of steam.

TEMP ................. 200 F 6PRESS ............... 00 psigSTATUS ............ EXHAUST

CYCLE ABORTED!


Figure 3-9. Typical Printout of a LeakTest Cycle

2. Once chamber reaches 4 psig (0.28 Pbar), the ster-ilizer removes vapor from the chamber for 1-minute.

3. Once vapor removal is over, status line changes toCOMPLETE. When complete, the sterilizer cham-ber can be unloaded following the instructionsearlier in this section of the manual.

3-22764330-117

3.18 EMERGENCY DOOR OPENINGPROCEDURE

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: After manualexhaust, steam may remain inside the chamber.Always wear protective gloves, apron, and a faceshield when following emergency procedure tounload sterilizer. Stay as far back from the cham-ber opening as possible when opening the door.

This procedure should only be used when pressureremains in the sterilizer chamber, and the door cannotbe opened normally because the sterilizer has losteither electrical or water utilities. This emergencydoor opening procedure can be used to retrieve a loadin the chamber. The procedure requires pushing onthe door cover to compress the door seal into thegroove, then operating the door manually.

NOTE: Do not use this procedure when a LIQUID load isinside the sterilizer chamber. The load may boil over dueto the fast exhaust process. Contact STERIS for assis-tance.

Procedure:

Refer to Figure 3-10.

1. Remove the lower front panel on the sterilizer.

2. Open the chamber emergency exhaust valve locatedat the bottom of the unit behind the lower frontpanel. Do not open the second valve at this time.

3. Monitor the chamber pressure gauge located on thefront left hand side panel. Wait until the gaugereads 0 psig (0 bar) pressure in the sterilizer cham-ber. Valve must remain open, even after chamberpressure reaches 0 psig.

4. When the pressure in the sterilizer chamber reaches0. Open the second emergency exhaust valve. Thisvalve relieves the door seal. Wait approximatelythree minutes for door seal to exhaust. Valve mustremain open.

5. Using a towel or sterilizer loading mitt, push thedoor in at each of the four corners. This will com-press the door seal into the door seal groove andallow the door to be opened.

6. Open the door.

Hinged-door units: Operate the release lever, andswing the door open.

Sliding-door units: Once the door seal has beencompressed, push the door in the normal directionof travel to open. The door will slide stiffly, so beprepared to push hard.

7. Once the door is open, do not use the sterilizer untila qualified service technician has examined theunit. Further use without attention may damagethe sterilizer.

8. Close both of the emergency exhaust valves.

Figure 3-10. Chamber and Seal EmergencyExhaust Valves

NOTE: Both valves are shown in the closed position.

1. Open Chamber Exhaust ValveFIRST. Observe chamber gauge untilpressure reaches 0 psig (0 bar).

2. Open Seal Exhaust Valve SECOND.

3-23764330-117

3.19 CYCLE GRAPHS

These cycle graphs provide a visual representation ofCentury Medium Sterilizer cycles and their phases.For technical cycle graphs, see Reference Drawingsection.

Figure 3-12. Cycle Graph - Gravity Cycle(For technical cycle graphs, see Reference Drawing section)

TIME ➠➠➠➠➠

Figure 3-11. Cycle Graph - Prevacuum and Bowie-Dick Cycles(For technical cycle graphs, see Reference Drawing section)

PULSES

1 2 3 4

0 PSIG


PRES

SURE

STERILIZE

FAST

EXH

AUST

PURGE

RETR

ACT

SEAL

EXHAUST

ACTI

VATE

SEA

L

CONDITIONING

COM

PLET

E

VACU

UM D

RY

DRY

AIR

BREA

K

CHARGE

INDICATES KEY CYCLETRANSITION POINTSTHAT ARE PRINTEDDURING CYCLE

0 PSIG

PRES

SURE

INDICATES KEYCYCLE TRANSITIONPOINTS THAT AREPRINTED DURINGCYCLE

STERILIZE

FAST

EXH

AUST

PURGE RETR

ACT

SEAL

EXHAUST

ACTI

VATE

SEA

L

CONDITIONING

COM

PLET

E

VACU

UM D

RY

DRY

AIR

BREA

K

CHARGE

3-24764330-117

Figure 3-13. Cycle Graph - Leak Test(For technical cycle graphs, see Reference Drawing section)

Figure 3-14. Cycle Graph — Steam Flush Pressure Pulse WRAP/SFPP and SFPP Cycles(For technical cycle graphs, see Reference Drawing section)

0 PSIG

PRES

SURE



CONDITIONINGSTEAM FLUSH

*PULSE #N

STERILIZE EXHAUST

ACTI

VATE

SEA

L

AIR

DISP

LACE

MEN

T(P

URGE

)

CHAR

GE

FAST

EXH

AUST

VACU

UM D

RYDR

Y

COM

PLET

E

AIR

BREA

K

RETR

ACT

SEAL

STEAM FLUSH

*NOTE: WRAP/SFPP cycle has two-pulse steam flushes; SFPP cycle has three-pulse steam flushes.

0 PSIG

PRES

SURE


PULSES

EVACUATE PURGE RETR

ACT

SEAL

LEAK TESTING

ACTI

VATE

SEA

L

CONDITIONING

COM

PLET

E

STAB

ILIZ

ING

AIR

BREA

K

CHARGE1 2 LEAK TEST


3-25764330-117

Figure 3-15. Cycle Graph - Liquid Cycle(For technical cycle graphs, see Reference Drawing section)

PRES

SURE

INDICATES KEY CYCLETRANSITION POINTSTHAT ARE PRINTEDDURING CYCLE

STERILIZE SLOW EXHAUST

VAPO

RRE

MOV

AL

PURGE CHARGE

RETR

ACT

SEALCONDITIONING

ACTI

VATE

SEAL


0 PSIG

4-1764330-117

Section 4: Principles of Operation

4.1 GENERAL

The Amsco®Century® medium steam sterilizer isavailable in three chamber sizes:

• 26" W x 37.5" H x 36" D

• 26" W x 37.5" H x 48" D

• 26" W x 37.5" H x 60" D

Two door configurations are available: manual hingeand power horizontal-sliding door. Manual modelscan be either right- or left-hand. Sliding-door unitsare available as left-hand only. Double door unitsare available in the 48" and 60" chamber sizes only.

Two models are available: a Prevacuum version thatwill run Prevacuum, Gravity, and Liquids cycles;and a SFPP version that will run Steam Flush Pres-sure Pulse (SFPP), Prevacuum, Gravity, and Liquidscycles.

Loading equipment can be either loading cars withtracks in the chamber or rack and shelves.

4.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENTDESCRIPTION

This section describes mechanical components onthe sterilizer and their general effect on sterilizeroperation. Details of component actuation will bedescribed in section 4.4.

Refer to plumbing schematic drawing 146660-535.

Steam is supplied to the unit through MV2 manualvalve, through strainer ST2, to pressure reducingvalve PR1 and then to steam to jacket valve S9. TrapTR-3 removes condensate when the unit is turnedOFF or when in auto-utility shutdown mode.

The unit uses an active door seal with steam to seal(S35) and seal exhaust (S37) sharing the same port.Double door NOE use S36 and S38 respectively.Pressure behind the seal is monitored by the controlusing PS1 (and PS2 on double door units). A me-chanical door lock DL1 (and DL2 on double doorunits) is actuated when there is pressure behind theseal.

Steam temperature in the jacket is monitored byRTD3 in the jacket drain line upstream of jacketstrainer ST3 and jacket trap TR2. Back flow into thejacket is prevented by check valve CK3.

Steam to chamber is controlled by S2. The chamber ismonitored for temperature by RTD1 and RTD4. RTD1

is used for temperature control and RTD4 is used asa reference probe. The control monitors the differ-ence between the two probes and an alarm will occurif the deviation exceeds a maximum value.

Internal chamber pressure is monitored by pressuretransducer PT1. The liquid level switch CS1 moni-tors for the presence of water in the chamber and willset off an alarm if any is detected.

The chamber exhaust plumbing consists of S3 fastexhaust valve, S40 slow exhaust valve, TR1 chambertrap and MV3 and MV4 emergency manual exhaustvalves. Back flow into the chamber and door sealgroove from the drain is prevented by check valveCK-8. Back flow is also prevented by check valveCK-4.

All chamber and door seal exhaust is routed to HX1heat exchanger, except for exhaust from emergencymanual exhaust valve MV3 which is routed directlyto drain. Steam vapors are quenched in HX1 bywater supplied by either S4 exhaust cooling or S46waste cooling valve. S4 valve is a high volume flowvalve and operates when high levels of steam arepresent, such as during purge. S46 is a low volumeflow valve and is used to cool the drain during lowflow conditions, such as those existing during idlephase, when only the jacket trap operates. S46 willalso operate at various points in the cycle as an assistto S4. Water is supplied to these valves through MV1manual valve and ST1 water strainer. Back flow isprevented by CK5 check valve. Backflow preventionfor facility water, however, is provided by the cus-tomer.

The vacuum system consists of vacuum pump VP1.Water is supplied to the vacuum pump by solenoidS7 and water pressure supplied to the pump is moni-tored by pressure switch PS3. The vacuum pumpalso utilizes a drain valve S43 which drains waterfrom the pump when the pump is off so that noise onstart-up is reduced. A needle valve with check valveis installed on the vacuum pump inlet line, upstreamof HX1, which is adjusted to reduce vacuum pumpnoise when at deep vacuum.

Water from the vacuum pump drains into a sumpthat contains RTD2. The control monitors tempera-ture with RTD2 and turns on S4 and S46 as required,to cool waste water in the sump.

4-2764330-117

4.3 CENTURY CONTROL THEORY OFOPERATION

The Century series sterilizer uses a control made upof the following sub-sections:

1. Main Control

2. Display

Operating End

Non Operating End

3. Analog Devices

4.4 MAIN CONTROL

The Main Control is mounted on the side of thevessel. The Display Module is mounted on the frontpanel. Analog devices are located in the piping.Connections between these items are by quick dis-connect cables. The only hard wiring involved in thesterilizer is for the customer’s 120 VAC single-phaseand three-phase power connection.

Refer to schematic 141215-206, 146660-557,146660-558, 146660-559, and 146660-560 throughoutthe following:

Main Control Box has an access door fastened with1/4 turn screws, and consists of the following:

A. Incoming Power Terminal Block

Three position block for connection of the 120 VACincoming power. Power is fed into the box througha knock-out on the side or top of the control box.Block is located in the upper left hand corner of thecontrol box.

B. Power Switch

ON/OFF switch to control power from terminalblock to line filter. A parallel tap off the powerswitch feeds unfiltered 120 VAC to J13 on the Con-nector Board.

C. Line Filter

Feeds fused (F3), filtered 120 VAC to J14 on theConnector Board. All components on the Centurysterilizer, except for the vacuum pump, use filteredAC power.

D.Connector Board

Interfaces incoming 120 VAC, Power Supply, CPUboard, I/O board, and all external components. TheConnector Board contains only traces and connec-tors. There are no fuses or serviceable componentson the board. Refer to schematic 146659-070.

E. Power Supply (see Figure 4-1)

Receives filtered 120 VAC from J15A on the Connec-

tor Board at J3A on the Power Supply.

• Outputs on J3B are - 15V, +12V, +15V, and +5V.

• Outputs on J2 and J4 are +24V. The J2 powers thecontrol box fan motor.

• There are 2 fuses on the power supply, Fl and F2.These fuses are on the incoming AC side of thepower supply. If either fuse fails, it is due to acatastrophic internal failure of the power supply(e.g., shorted transformer). The fuse does notblow due to an output overload or short circuit. Ifthe fuse fails, the power supply is bad.

• The power supply is a switching type. Should anoutput overload occur (e.g., short circuit on theoutput), the power supply automatically dropsvoltage to prevent power supply and circuit dam-age. Recovery after a fault is automatic on powerup or power down.

4.4.1 CPU Board

The CPU board is made up of the following: CPU8OC186EC high integration processor, FlashMemory, A/D Converter Section, RAM Memoryand Battery Back-up.

The block layout of the CPU board is shown inFigure 4-2. This design allows the unit to be con-nected to various computer devices, such as floppydisk drives, modems and desktop or portable per-sonal computers. Unit can be programed throughserial interface from a modem or personal com-puter.

A. CPU Chip

The CPU chip is soldered in and is not field replace-able.

B. Flash Memory

The controller is designed with Flash memory andStatic RAM memory. Flash memory can be repro-grammed electrically from a remote location, floppydisc, host computer or individually. The FlashMemory consists of four removable chips: U12, U13,U15 and U16. Location, identification and orienta-tion are shown in Figure 4-3.

C. Static RAM

The RAM on the board consists of up to 2 chips U3and U1. The RAM does not contain the battery back-up and is soldered on the board. All RAM memoryfunctions are controlled by the CPU.

D.A/D Converter Section

The A/D converter section consists of 8 input chan-nels. One channel is reserved for reference, one foran on-board temperature sensor, and six are broughtout for RTDs and pressure transducers.

4-3764330-117

Figure 4-1. Century Power Supply

4-4764330-117

Figure 4-2. Block Diagram

Figure 4-3. Century CPU Board

NOTE:1. Use chip extractor, P-764326-559, to remove the Flash Memory from the socket.2. Replacement CPU boards do not have an application program installed.

Analog Section

Analog Connector

4-5764330-117

E. Battery Back-up

The RAM is backed up by the battery chip U2. Itcontains Nickel Cadmium batteries. Battery life is 8years; with the control powered up 16 hours perday. The battery's shelf life is 10 years. The batterycan be replaced without losing memory.

4.4.1.1 CPU Board Setup

The CPU board used is 141215-202. ReplacementCPU Boards are unprogrammed. It is necessary totransfer the Flash chips from the original board andinstall them in the new CPU board or install a newprogrammed chip set.

A. Flash Chip Change

Use PLCC Puller Part # 764326-559 (also available atRadio Shack) to extract the chips. Instructions areincluded with the PLCC Puller on its proper use.Use static protection when replacing all chips.

The FLASH memory consists of four chips: U12,U13, U15 & U16. The memory is split into high andlow bytes, U12 & U16 contain high and U13 & U15contain the low bytes. The control will not workcorrectly if these chips are not installed in the correctorder.

When installing the Flash chips into the socket, besure to pay attention to the orientation of the chip inthe socket. The dot on the chip must be aligned withthe arrow molded into the side of the socket. SeeFigure 4-3.

B. Jumpers

The CPU board utilizes a jumper board assembly(93921-211) that is plugged into J12. This jumperboard establishes the correct configuration for theanalog channels (RTD and Pressure Transducer).No adjustments are necessary.

C. LED Display on CPU Board

Five LEDs are located on the CPU board.

5V indicates 5 Volt power to board

1 RES indicates processor reset

12V indicates 12 volt power to board

-VIN indicates -15 Volt power to board

When the control is turned on, the RESET lightshould blink ON, then remain OFF. Repeated flashindicates a fault.

A small LED is located on the CPU board whichblinks on power up and then turns off. The LEDturns on steady to indicate a flash memory or boardfailure.

4.4.2 I/O BOARD

A. Overview

The Century I/O board processes all the inputs (LSswitches) and all outputs (triac drivers). All me-dium Century controls require two I/O boards. Board146659-066 is used in position D, board 146659-008is used in position C. See Figure 4-4. Each I/O boardcontains 16 output drivers and 16 input circuits.

On board 146659-066, two types of drivers are used:a mechanical relay and a solid state driver. Therelays are used as individual switched neutrals. Thesolid state drivers are triacs and are used to supplypower to the various valves and motors. Each of thesolid state drivers is protected by a 0.63 Amp fuse.The solid state drivers and fuses are replaceable.

On board 146658-008, all drivers are solid state thatare protected by 0.8 Amp fuses, each of these are alsoreplaceable.

Fuses are used to prevent damage to the board in thecase of a shorted valve coil.

See Tables 4-1 and 4-2.

LEDs on the edge of the I/O board indicate thestatus of the outputs and inputs. LED and driverdesignations changed between the old and currentboard. When troubleshooting, make sure to identifythe board configuration. LEDs that indicate the sta-tus of the output circuit are actually wired in paral-lel and indicate that the driver has received a signalto turn on. It does not indicate the actual status of theoutput. It is possible for the LED to indicate that anoutput is turned on even if the output circuit hasfailed at the driver.

B. I/O Configuration

Dip switches are used to configure the board to thecorrect serial address. Refer to Table 4-1 and 4-2 onthe following pages for connections:

146659-008

SW1 - 2 & 8 "ON", 1,3,4,5,6, & 7 "OFF".

SW2, SW3 - All "OFF" or switch not loaded.

146659-066

SW1-1 "ON", 2,3, & 4 "OFF."

4-6764330-117

I/O Board 146659-066

LED Driven Component Driver Fuse Reference Driver on Schematic

D16 Door A Close DRV16 F16 AC15

D15 S40 DRV15 F15 AC14

D14 Door A Open DRV14 F14 AC13

D13 S37 DRV13 F13 AC12

D12 S3 DRV12 F12 AC11

D11 S7/VAC Pump SSR DRV11 F11 AC10

D10 S4 DRV10 F10 AC9

D9 Not Used

D8 S9 DRV8 F8 AC7

D7 S1 DRV7 F7 AC6

D6 S36 DRV6 F6 AC5

D5 S35 DRV5 F5 AC4

D4 S2 DRV4 F4 AC3

D3 Sw Neutral S36 DRV3 F3 AC2



LED Switch on Sterilizer Limit Switch on Schematic

S16

S15

S14

S13

S12 LS6 Door B Pressure Lock (Hinge) LS11

S11 LS5 Door A Pressure Lock (Hinge) LS10

S10

S9

S8 LS4 Door B Hinge Closed #2/Slider Open LS7

S7 LS3 Door A Hinge Closed #2/Slider Open LS6

S6 LS2 Door B Closed SW LS5

S5 LS4 Door A Closed SW LS4

S4 PS3 VAC Pump Water Pressure SW LS3

S3 PS2 Door B Seal Pressure SW LS2

S2 PS1 Door A Seal Pressure SW LS1

S1 CS1 Chamber Flood SW LS0

Table 4-1

4-7764330-117

I/O Board 146659-008

LED Drive Component Driver Fuse Reference Driver on Schematic

D16 Not Used

D15 Not Used

D14 Not Used

D14 Not Used

D13 Not Used

D12 Not Used

D11 Not Used

D10 Not Used

D9 Not Used

D8 Door B Close DRV8 F8 AC7/2

D7 S46 DRV7 F7 AC 6/2

D6 S43 DRV6 F6 AC 5/2

D5 Door B Open DRV5 F5 AC 4/2

D4 Not Used

D3 Not Used

D2 Not Used

D1 Not Used

LED Switch on Sterilizer Limit Switch on Schematic

No switch inputs on I/O board 146659-008

LED Explaination

5V 5 Volt power to board

CF Communication indicator (lit when communicating with CPU). Flashing indicates fault in comunication.

15V 15 Volt power to board

ISO 12 Volt power to board for limit switches

Table 4-2

4-8764330-117

4.5 DISPLAY

The Operating End (OE) and Non-operating End(NOE) controls are similar, first discussed will bethe OE control. It consists of the following items:

A. Touch Screen

This is a 1/8-inch thick clear plastic grid which has64 switches, arranged in a 8 x 8 square. Pressing onthe grid actuates the switch in a way similar to amembrane type key pad. Switch closure is not, how-ever, like a mechanical switch. When the switch isOPEN, contact resistance is approx. 20 megOhms.When the switch is closed, the resistance is a maxi-mum of 20 KOhms. The control interprets the reduc-tion in resistance as switch actuation.

The touch screen is held in place by double-sidedtape.

NOTE: Although there are 64 individual switches with asize of 0.4411 x 0.611, the control can display a largerpushbutton by combining several switches together.Pressing anywhere within the larger pushbutton acti-vates one of the switches, causing the control to re-spond.

B. Display Module

This is a vacuum fluorescent device operating onboth 5 VDC and 90 VDC. It has two cable connectors,C1 which carries the display signals, and C2 whichconnects the power supply.

There are no serviceable components on the displaymodule. A fuse is present; it is, however, solderedin, and failure of this fuse indicates a catastrophicinternal failure of the module.

Power is supplied to the Display Module from theInterface Board. An overload condition of the Dis-play Module (e.g., short) can cause Interface Boardfailure.

C. Display Interface Board

See Figure 4-4.

This device handles the communication link be-tween the Main Control and the Display Moduleand the Printer. This component includes a trans-former which supplies the necessary power to theDisplay Module.

Serviceable components on the Display InterfaceBoard include:

1. U17 relay – controls the paper take up motor.

2. SW1 – voltage selector - set to 115 V (may or maynot be present)

3. S1 dip switch – set 1, 8 ON; the rest OFF

4.JP1, JP2, JP3 jumpers – jumper pins 2 and 3 on allthree.

Refer to the Century Control reference section forproper setting of SW1, S1, and jumper pins.

Note that the interface board contains two fuses, F1and F2. These fuses are on the output side of theboard mounted transformer. The transformer sup-plies power to the Display Module. Should a faultoccur in the Display Module, one or both of thesefuses could fail. These fuses are soldered-in and arenot field replaceable. If either fuse has failed, theboard itself must be replaced.

There is an LED for the 90 Volt output of the trans-former. This LED is downstream of the fuse. Checkvoltage supply to the board prior to replacing anInterface Board because of loss of 90 volt LED.

D.Printer Board Assembly

See Figure 4-5.

This is found only on the OE control. This boardhandles the interface between the control and theimpact printer.

Serviceable components on this board include:

1. U8 relay – not used in the Century control appli-cation, this provides 120 VAC output to J43 pin.

2. SW1 dip switch – set 3, 4, 5, 8 to ON, rest OFF.

3. W1 and W2 jumpers – W1 jumper pin 2 to pin 3;and W2 jumper pin1 to pin 2.

There is also a limit switch, SW2, on the board. Thisis used for paper take up control on other applica-tions of this board, however it is not used in theCentury control application. The Century controlautomatically turns on the paper take up motor totake up one line of printer tape for every line thecontrol prints.

E. Power Supply

A power supply is mounted to the back of the papertake-up housing. Its purpose is to supply 5 volt DCto the display interface board. This power supply isrequired because the Century control box is locateda significant enough distance from the display sothat the control box power supply suffers an unac-ceptable voltage drop. By having a power supplyadjacent to the display interface board, proper volt-age is assured. Correct voltage in this application is5.2 volts, which allows for sufficient voltage whenthe printer is operated.

F. Speaker

Both OE and NOE displays have a speaker. Volumeis adjustable in Service Mode.

4-9764330-117

Figure 4-4. Interface Board

Figure 4-5. Printer Board

S1 Dip Switch

OE Display Position 1 & 8 ON

NOE Display Position 2 & 8 ON

JP-1, 2 & 3

Jumper Pins on 2 – 3

Poisition 3, 5 & 8 ON

4-10764330-117

G.Printer

On OE only, printer is an impact type with replace-able ribbon cartridge. Printer itself is replaceable.

H.Paper Take Up Mechanism

120 VAC motor is controlled by a replaceable relayon the Interface Board. Motor operates by taking upone line of printer tape for every line printed.

Paper take up spool is held in place by a magneticholder.

4.6 ANALOG DEVICES

4.6.1 Pressure Transducer (See Figure 4-6)

One is used in the Century sterilizer. Transduceroutput can be measured with a VOM between theoutput leads. See test procedure later in this section.

4.6.2 RTD (See Figure 4-7)

Three RTDs are used, one each in the chamber drain,jacket, and waste line. The chamber RTD is a dualelement RTD.

Resistance can be measured by disconnecting theRTD plug and measuring with a Volt Ohm Meter(VOM) between the two RTD leads.

Figure 4-6. Pressure Transducer SENSOTEC (50 PSIA) for Chamber Pressure

4-11764330-117

Figure 4-7. RTD Temperature Probe

The Centrury uses a standard 5 VDC and a 12 VDClogic system that is optically coupled to the control.The logic levels are as follows:

4-12764330-117

4.7 CYCLES AND PHASES

Refer to applicable cycle graph. See reference pagesfor technical cycle graphs.

Note components shown in parentheses ( ) denotecomponents used only on double door sterilizers.

4.7.1 Prevacuum Cycle

A. Jacket Temperature - Out of Cycle

On healthcare units the jacket is maintained be-tween 265 - 270°F by controlling S9 valve. Tempera-ture is monitored from RTD3.

B. Activate Seal(s)

S35 (S36) will pulse during the seal phase. When thepressure behind the seal reaches 5 psig and after a 5second delay, the cycle will advance to the Purgephase.

C. Purge

S2 (Steam to Chamber), S3 (Fast Exhaust), S4 (Ex-haust Cooling Water), S35 (S36), S7 (Vacuum Wa-ter), and VP1 (Vacuum Pump) are ON for 60 sec-onds. S46 will also be ON if temperature measuredby sump RTD2 is > 110°F. S1 is ON and will remainON until Air Break phase. (S1 is a normally openvalve.)

D.Vacuum Pulse

S2 turns OFF. At 4 psig S4 will turn OFF unless RTD2is > 135°F. S9 will be intermittent while controllingto maintain jacket temperature (250° if running a250°F cycle, 270° if running a 270°F cycle). A vacuumpulls for one minute after reaching 4 psig. S46 turnsON at 4 psig and turns OFF when 10" Hg is reached.Once 10" Hg is reached, the control progresses to thepressure pulse. If not at 10" Hg after one minute, theunit remains in the vacuum pulse until 10" Hg isreached, after reaching 4 psig.

E. Pressure Pulse

S3, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S2 and S9 turn ON untilchamber pressure reaches 26 psig. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F.

Vacuum/Pressure pulses repeat in sequence for atotal of 4 pulses. The 4th Pressure pulse becomesCharge.

F. Charge

S3, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S2 turns ON. S9 will be ONto a pressure setting (15 psig for a 250°F cycle, 26

psig for a 270°F cycle), then operates intermittentlyto 0.2°F of set point at which point S9 stays ON until0.1°F over set point, then continues to operate inter-mittently to control temperature. This process isused to limit temperature overshoot. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F.

G.Sterilize

S9 is intermittent while controlling chamber tem-perature at control point. S4 turns ON if RTD2 is >135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to 130°F. S46turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFF whenRTD2 drops to 120°F.

H.Fast Exhaust

S2 turns OFF. S9 is intermittent while controllingjacket temperature. S3, S4, S46, S7, and VP1are ONuntil chamber reaches 4 psig. S4 turns OFF unlessRTD2 reads > 135°F. Transitions to Dry phase at 4psig.

I. Dry

S46 remains ON for 2 minutes after 4 psig is reachedregardless of RTD2 temperature. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130 F. After 2 minutes into dry, S46 turns ON if RTD2is > 125°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F.Phase continues for the Dry phase set time. Thechamber vacuum level reaches the limit of thevacuum system; no minimum set point must beachieved.

J. Air Break

When the dry timer times out, S3, S7, and VP1 turnOFF. S1 turns OFF. S4 turns ON if RTD2 is > 135°Fand turns OFF when RTD2 drops to 130°F. S46 turnsON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFF when RTD2drops to 120°F. Transitions to Retract Seal phase at2" Hg.

K. Retract Seals

S1 remains OFF, S35 (S36) turns OFF, S37 (S38), S7,and VP1 turn ON. After the seal pressure switchopens, the vacuum will pull for an additional 18seconds. Transitions to Complete phase.

L. Complete

S1 remains OFF, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S4 turns ONif RTD2 is > 135°F and will turn OFF when RTD2drops to 130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F andturns OFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F. S9 is intermit-tent to maintain jacket temperature at 265° to 270°F.

4-13764330-117

4.7.2 Gravity Cycle


On Healthcare units the jacket is maintained be-tween 265 - 270°F by controlling S9 valve. Tempera-ture is monitored from RTD3. When a 250°F cycle isselected, jacket is maintained at 245 - 250°F.

B. Activate Seal(s)

S35 (S36) pulse during the seal phase. When thepressure behind the seal reaches 5 psig and after a 5second delay, the cycle advances to the Purge phase.

C. Purge

S2 (Steam to Chamber), S3 (Fast Exhaust), S4 (Ex-haust Cooling Water), S35 (S36), S7 (Vacuum Wa-ter), and VP1 (Vacuum Pump) are ON for 60 sec-onds. S46 is also ON if temperature measured bysump RTD2 is > 110°F. S9 shuts off if chamberpressure exceeds 10 psig for a 250°F cycle. S1 is ONand remains ON until Air Break phase. (S1 is anormally open valve.)

D.Charge

S3, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S2 turns ON. S9 is ON toa pressure setting (15 psig for a 250°F cycle, 26 psigfor a 270°F cycle), then operates intermittently to0.2°F of set point at which point S9 stays ON until0.1°F over set point, then continues to operate inter-mittently to control temperature. This process isused to limit temperature overshoot. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F.

E. Sterilize


F. Fast Exhaust

S2 turns OFF. S9 is intermittent while controllingjacket temperature. S3, S4, S46, S7, and VP1 are ONuntil chamber reaches 4 psig. S4 turns OFF unlessRTD2 reads > 135°F. Transitions to Dry phase at 4psig.

G.Dry

S46 remains ON for 2 minutes after 4 psig is reachedregardless of RTD2 temperature. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. After 2 minutes into dry, S46 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to120 F. Phase continues for the Dry phase set time.

The chamber vacuum level will reach the limit of thevacuum system; no minimum set point must beachieved.

H.Air Break


I. Retract Seals

S1 remains OFF, S35 (S36) turns OFF, S37 (S38), S7,and VP1 turn ON. After the seal pressure switchopens, the vacuum pulls for an additional 18 sec-onds. Transitions to Complete phase.

J. Complete

S1 remains OFF, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S4 turns ONif RTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 dropsto 130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F. S9 is intermittent tomaintain jacket temperature at 265 to 270°F oncedoor is opened.

4.7.3 SFPP Cycles


On Healthcare units, the jacket is maintained be-tween 265 - 270°F by controlling S9 valve. Tempera-ture is monitored from RTD3.

B. Activate Seal(s)


C. Purge

S2 (Steam to Chamber), S3 (Fast Exhaust), S4 (Ex-haust Cooling Water), S35 (S36), S7 (Vacuum Wa-ter), and VP1 (Vacuum Pump) are ON for 120 sec-onds after 0.5 psig is reached. S46 is ON if tempera-ture measured by sump RTD2 is > 110°F. S9 shuts offif chamber pressure exceeds 10 psig for a 270°Fcycle. S1 is ON and remains ON until Air Breakphase. (S1 is a normally open valve.)

4-14764330-117

D.Exhaust Pulse after Purge

S2 turns OFF. At 4, psig S4 turns OFF unless RTD2 is> 135°F. S9 is intermittent while controlling to main-tain jacket temperature (270 if running a 270°F cycle).S46 turns ON at 4 psig. At 0.5 psig above atmo-sphere, the cycle transitions to the Purge Flush phase.

E. Steam Flush after Purge

S2 and S3 cycle ON/OFF to maintain a pressure inthe chamber in the range of 0.5 and 1.0 psig. S2 turnsOFF if pressure exceeds 1.0 psig and S3 turns OFF ifpressure drops below 0.5 psig. S4 and S7 remain ONfor entire flush. This steam flush continues for 45seconds and then the cycle transitions to the Pres-sure Pulse phase.

F. Pressure Pulse

S3, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S2 and S9 turn ON untilchamber temperature reaches 270°F. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 120 F.

G.Exhaust Pulse

S2 turns OFF. At 4 psig, S4 turns OFF unless RTD2 is> 135°F. S9 is intermittent while controlling to main-tain jacket temperature (270 if running a 270°F cycle).S46 turns ON at 4 psig. At 0.5 psig above atmo-sphere, the cycle transitions to the Purge Flush phase.

H.Pressure Pulse Steam Flush

S2 and S3 cycle ON/OFF to maintain a pressure inthe chamber in the range of 1.5 and 2.0 psig. S2 turnsOFF if pressure exceeds 2.0 psig and S3 turns OFF ifpressure drops below 1.5 psig, S4 and S7 remain ONfor entire flush. This steam flush continues for 45seconds.

The Pressure Pulse, Exhaust Pulse, and Steam FlushPressure Pulse repeats, so that for a Wrappid/SFPPthere are a total of two pulses and for the SFPP cyclethere are three pulses.

I. Charge

At the end of the last flush, S3, S7, and VP1 turn OFF.S2 turns ON. S9 will be ON to a pressure setting (15psig for a 250°F cycle, 26 psig for a 270°F cycle), thenoperates intermittently to 0.2°F of set point at whichpoint S9 stays ON until 0.1°F over set point, thencontinues to operate intermittently to control tem-perature. This process is used to limit temperatureovershoot. S4 turns ON if RTD2 is > 135°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 130°F. S46 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 125°F and will turn OFF when RTD2 dropsto 120°F.

J. Sterilize


K. Fast Exhaust

S2 turns OFF. S9 is intermittent while controllingjacket temperature. S3, S4, S46, S7, and VP1 are ONuntil chamber reaches 4 psig. S4 turns OFF unlessRTD2 reads > 135°F. Transitions to Dry phase at 4psig.

L. Dry

S46 remains ON for 2 minutes after 4 psig is reachedregardless of RTD2 temperature. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. After 2 minutes into dry, S46 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to120°F. Phase continues for the Dry phase set time.The chamber vacuum level reaches the limit of thevacuum system; no minimum set point must beachieved.

M. Air Break


N.Retract Seals

S1 remains OFF, S35 (S36) turns OFF, S37 (S38), S7,and VP1 turn ON. After the seal pressure switchopens, the vacuum pulls for an additional 18 sec-onds. Transitions to Complete phase.

O.Complete

S1 remains OFF, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S4 turns ONif RTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 dropsto 130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turnsOFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F. S9 is intermittent tomaintain jacket temperature at 265 to 270°F.

4-15764330-117

4.7.4 Liquid Cycle


On Healthcare units the jacket is maintained be-tween 245 - 250°F by controlling S9 valve. Tempera-ture is monitored from RTD3.

B. Activate Seal(s)


C. Purge

S2 (Steam to Chamber), S3 (Fast Exhaust), S4 Ex-haust Cooling Water), S35 (S36), S7 (Vacuum Wa-ter), and VP1 (Vacuum Pump) are ON for 60 sec-onds. S46 is ON if temperature measured by sumpRTD2 is > 110°F. S9 shuts off if chamber pressureexceeds 10 psig for a 250°F cycle. S1 is ON andremains ON until Air Break phase (S1 is a normallyopen valve).

D.Charge

S3, S7, and VP1 turn OFF. S2 turns ON. S9 is ON toa pressure setting (15 psig for a 250°F cycle, 26 psigfor a 270°F cycle), then operates intermittently to0.2°F of set point at which point S9 stays On until0.1°F over set point, then continues to operate inter-mittently to control temperature. This process isused to limit temperature overshoot. S4 turns On ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. S46 turns On if RTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFFwhen RTD2 drops to 120°F

E. Sterilize

S9 is intermittent while controlling chamber tem-perature at control point. S4 turns On if RTD2 is >135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to 130°F. S46turns On if RTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFF whenRTD2 drops to 120°F

F. Slow Exhaust

All valves are OFF, except S1. S9 is intermittentwhile controlling jacket temperature. S4 turns ON ifRTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD is > 125°F and turn OFFwhen RTD2 drops to 120°F. Control toggles S40 tomaintain an exhaust rate of 1.6 psig/minute until 4.2psig is reached. If the exhaust rate is less than 1.6psig/minute, S3 operates as needed to meet thisrate.

At 4.2 psig, S9 jacket valve is turned OFF. S40 and S3operate to maintain an exhaust rate of 0.6 psig/minuntil 5" Hg is reached. Only S3 operates belowatmospheric pressure.

G.Air Break

When 5" Hg is reached, S3 turns OFF and S1 turnsOFF. S4 turns ON if RTD2 is > 135°F and turns OFFwhen RTD2 drops to 130°F. S46 turns ON if RTD2 is> 125°F and turns OFF when RTD2 drops to 120°F.Transitions to Retract Seal phase at 2 inHg.

H.Retract Seals

S1 remains OFF, S35 (S36) turns OFF, S37 (S38), S7,and VP1 turn ON. After the seal pressure switchopens, the vacuum pulls for an additional 18 sec-onds. Transitions to Cracked Door phase.

I. Cracked Door Phase

If hinge door unit, control sounds a tone and promptoperator to crack open the door 1".

If sliding door, control automatically opens the dooruntil the closed switch is no longer sensed, plus 1second. This cracks open the door.

For both hinge and sliding door units, a 6 minutetimer begins. S3, S38 and S39 (if DD unit) are ON,rest of the valves are OFF.

J. Complete

After 6 minutes, timer completes and control re-turns to READY state. S4 turns ON if RTD2 is > 135°Fand turns OFF when RTD2 drops to 130°F. S46 turnsON if RTD2 is > 125°F and turns OFF when RTD2drops to 120°F. S9 is intermittent to maintain jackettemperature at 265 to 270°F.

4-16764330-117

Index for Century 26 x 37.5" Reference Drawings

Description Sheets Included Part Number

Prevacuum Cycle Chart 1 of 1 N/A

Gravity Cycle Chart 1 of 1 N/A

SFPP & WRAPPID Cycle Chart 1 of 1 N/A

Piping Scehmatic 1 of 1 P146660-535

Machine Schematic 1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3 P146660-557

Final Wiring Assembly, Single Door 3 of 4, 4 of 4 P14660-489/490

Control Chassis, 4 Board 3 of 3 P141215-206

Printer, Display Control Housing Assembly 4 of 4 P141214-475

Contrl Board, 512K/768K Basic 2 of 4, 3 of 4, 4 of 4 P141215-207/208

I/O Board Assembly 2 of 3, 3 of 3 P146659-066

Stage 4 I/O Board, 16 AC Out, 1 Amp 2 of 3, 3 of 3 P146659-008

Connector Bord Assembly 1 of 2, 2 of 2 P146659-070

Cable Assembly, Solenoid S7 1 of 1 P93927-030

Cable Assembly, P18/LS1, LS2, LS3, LS4 1 of 1 P136816-026

Cable Assembly, P19/CS1, PS1, PS2, PS3 1 of 1 P136816-033

Cable Assembly – SD & DD 1 of 1 P136816-046

Cable Assembly – SD & DD, ChamberPressure Transducer –P23/PT1 1 of 1 P136816-046

Cable Assembly – SD & DD, P24/RTD1 & RTD4 1 of 1 P136816-049

Cable Assembly – Display – P27/P28 –P1A/P1B 1 of 1 P136816-051

Cable Assembly, P17/LS5, LS6 1 of 1 P136816-055

Cable Assembly, Pump Power 1 of 1 P136816-060

Cable Assembly, P10/S3, S37, S38, S40, MA 1 of 1 P146660-469

Cable Assembly, P12/S4, MB, S43, S46 1 of 1 P146660-470

Cable Assembly, P11/S1, S2, S9, S35, S36 1 of 1 P146660-474

Cable Assembly, P9/P10A, P10B 1 of 1 P146660-476

Printer, Display Control Housing Assemblywith Power Supply 4 of 4 P141214-476

Table 4-3

DESIGNATOR DESCRIPTION

DOUBLEDOORONLY

DOUBLEDOORONLY

PS2

PS2

PS2

ABB

PUMP

ABB

REMOVE JUMPER WIRE BETWEEN TB5-2 AND TB5-4 BEFORE MAKING

ANY ADDITIONAL CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL BLOCK

SLIDING DOOR UNITS ONLY

DETAIL "F"

TB5 TB5

TYP. FOR SINGLE DOOR UNITS

VIEW G-GTYP. FOR DOUBLE DOOR UNITS

VIEW G-G

TB5

SLIDING DOOR UNITS ONLY

VIEW G-GTYP. FOR SINGLE DOOR UNITS

TB5

VIEW G-GTYP. FOR DOUBLE DOOR UNITS

TB5

HINGED DOOR UNITS ONLYDETAIL "H"

WIRING SCHEMATIC FOR 208V. VAC, PUMP MOTORS

SEE DETAIL "F" PRIOR TO MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS TO THE TERMINAL BLOCKON SLIDING DOOR UNITS ONLY

DOOR NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY

VIEW E-E

G

G

5-1764330-117

Section 5: Service Mode

The Amsco®Century® Medium Steam sterilizer is pro-vided with a Service mode to direct all service-re-lated adjustments through the control system. Fromthis mode, a qualified service technician may:

• calibrate temperature probes and chamber pres-sure

• troubleshoot piping and electrical components

• change cycle values and sterilizer operating pa-rameters

See Figure 5-1 for Service Mode program tree.

IMPORTANT: Service mode should be accessed andused only by qualified service personnel.

This section outlines each of the service functionswhich can be performed from the service mode. Ser-vice mode programming across scientific andhealthcare sterilizers is virtually identical; differingonly in the method of access. Both methods of accessare shown on the following pages. Configurationscreens differ between the two types of units, due toscientific options not available to healthcare units.

5.1 ACCESS SERVICE MODE

5.1.1 Scientific Sterilizers

To access the Service Mode main menu (screen #331),

1. Press STERIS hexawave on screen #0.


STERILIZER PREPARED FOR:

STERIS SCIENTIFICCUSTOMER

MAIN MENU

CYCLESELECT OPTIONS

2. Press OPTIONS on screen #1.

Pressing CYCLE SELECT advances display to the firstCycle Select menu (screen #2).

3. Press NEXT on screen #13.

Pressing MAIN MENU returns display to screen #1.

4. Press SERVICE MODE on screen #87.

13OUT OF CYCLE OPTIONS

STATUS CHANGEPRINT VALUES

DUPLICATE DISPLAYPRINT VALUES

PAPER PRINTFEED VALUES

MAINMENUNEXT

87OUT OF CYCLE OPTIONS

PREVIOUS MAINMENU

SUPER-VISORY

DISPLAY SERVICESENSORS MODE

Pressing PREVIOUS returns display to screen #13.



PREPARED FOR:

STERISSCIENTIFICCUSTOMER

STERILIZER ID:

VACO1

STANDBY

5-2764330-117

7. To exit the Service mode, press RETURN on screen#331. Control saves all adjustments made anddisplay returns to screen #87.

5.2 ACCESS SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 Healthcare Sterilizers

To access the Service mode main menu (screen #331).

SERVICE MODE EAGLE CENTURY SERIES

Revision 0Mar 17 2002 18:04:47

3/21/94 8:25:45 AM

RUN TIME = 0.2 hrCYCLE CNT = 0

Figure 5-2. Sample Printout

5. Enter the four-digit service access code using thenumeric keypad. The service access code is theyear currently programmed in the control (e.g.,2002). Service access code automatically updatesto correspond with the programmed date; serviceaccess code cannot be customized.

Once code is correctly entered, press ENTER.

NOTE: If incorrect code is entered, pressing ENTERdenies access to the Service mode and returns displayto screen #1.

Pressing CANCEL returns display to screen #1.

6. Display advances to the Service mode main menu(screen #331) and printer records the revisionlevel, date and time when Service mode was pro-grammed and the current date, time, run time andcycle count when Service mode was accessed (seeFigure 1).

Screen #331 lists all the functions that can beperformed from the Service mode. To perform aspecific function, refer to the description, includedin this section, titled the same as the button onscreen #331.

1. Press ON button on screen #0.

2. Press MENU on screen #1.

331SERVICE MODE - MAIN MENU

RETURN

CALIBRATION VALVE HISTORY

INPUT/OUTPUT ALARM/TESTS MAINTENANCE

ADJUSTMENTS

MAINMENU

CHANGEVALUES

331


332ACCESS CODE

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

←←←←← 0 →→→→→

A SERVICE MODE ACCESSCODE IS REQUIRED.

0000

CANCEL ENTERSTATUS STANDBY 0TIME 00:00 AMDATE 00-00-00

ON

STATUS DOOR OPEN 1TEMP 000FPRESS 00 PSIG

1 2 3 4PREVAC PREVAC GRAVITY LIQUID

270F 270F 270F 250FS=04M S=04M S=30M S=45MD=05M D=20M D=15M D=00M

00:00 AM 00-00-00


MENU STANDBY

5-3764330-117

PAPERFEED

STATUS MENU 2TEMP 000 FPRESS 00 PSIG

CHANGE CHANGE CHANGETIME CYCLE MACHINE DUPLICATE

& VALUES SETUP PRINTDATE

332ACCESS CODE

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

←←←←← 0 →→→→→

ENTER SERVICE ACCESSCODE, OR PRESS CANCEL TORETURN TO MENU.

0000

CANCEL ENTER

3. Press the "2" in the upper right hand corner ofscreen #2.

4. Enter the four-digit service access code using thenumeric keypad. The service access code is theyear currently programmed in the control (e.g.,2001). Service access code automatically updatesto correspond with the programmed date; serviceaccess code cannot be customized.

Once code is correctly entered, press ENTER.

NOTE: If incorrect code is entered, pressing ENTERdenies access to the Service mode and returns displayto screen #1.

5. Display advances to the Service mode main menu(screen #331) and printer records the revisionlevel, date and time when Service mode was pro-grammed and the current date, time, run time andcycle count when Service mode was accessed (seeFigure 2).

Screen #331 lists all the functions that can beperformed from the Service mode. To perform aspecific function, refer to the description, includedin this section, titled the same as the button onscreen #331.

6. To exit the Service mode, press RETURN on screen#331. Control saves all adjustments made anddisplay returns to screen #2.

5.3 CALIBRATION

Calibration option allows the service technician to:

• review different methods of calibration

• calibrate temperature and pressure probes

• change temperature and pressure units

• display current temperature readings for verifi-cation

• display record of the last five times the calibrationroutine was performed.


RETURN



ADJUSTMENTS

MAINMENU

CHANGEVALUES

Figure 5-3. Sample Printout


RETURN MAINMENU



ADJUSTMENTS

EXIT

CHANGEVALUES

Access Code= Year currently programmed

5-4764330-117

AmscoAmscoAmscoAmscoAmsco®®®®® Centur Centur Centur Centur Centuryyyyy®®®®® Medium Steam Sterilizer 2 Medium Steam Sterilizer 2 Medium Steam Sterilizer 2 Medium Steam Sterilizer 2 Medium Steam Sterilizer 26 x6 x6 x6 x6 x 37.5"37.5"37.5"37.5"37.5"SerSerSerSerService Mode Prvice Mode Prvice Mode Prvice Mode Prvice Mode Program Togram Togram Togram Togram Trrrrreeeeeeeeee


RETURN



ADJUSTMENTS

Figure 5-1. Service M

odeP

rogram Tree

CHANGE VALUES5.8

ALARM/MAINTENANCE

5.7

VALVE HISTORY5.6

Valve Service 5.6.1View Valve Actuation History 5.6.2View Valve Cycle Count History 5.6.3

Alarm List 5.7.1Alarm Log 5.7.2Show Screens 5.7.3Pushbutton Test 5.7.4Battery Saver 5.7.5Configure Machine 5.7.6

Cycle Count & Run TimeValues

• Cycles• Time/Date• Too Long In

Phase• Setup

CalibrationHistory5.3.6

CalibrationOverview

5.3.1

Definitions of Calibration Methods

CalibrateTemperature

5.3.2

Steam 5.3.2.1Oil Bath 5.3.2.2Load Values 5.3.2.3

CalibratePressure

5.3.3

Temp/PressUnits5.3.4

Temp/PressVerification

5.3.5

Steam 5.3.3.1External 5.3.3.2Load Values 5.3.3.3

ADJUSTMENTS5.5

Safety Valve Test/ Regulator Setting 5.5.1Door Sensor Adjustments 5.5.2Door Pressure Setting 5.5.3Leak Test 5.5.4

INPUT/OUTPUTTESTS

5.4

CALIBRATION5.3

I/O Test

°C or °F 5.3.4.2psig/inHg, psia or Bar 5.3.4.1

Displays Current Sensor Readings

NOTE: Case numbers for correspondingparagraphs within this section of the manualare shown below on the chart.

CHANGEVALUES

Log of Past 5 Calibrations

5-5764330-117

1. Press CALIBRATION on screen #331.


2. Screen #352 lists the available calibration func-tions. To perform a specific function, refer to thefollowing description titled the same as the but-ton on screen #352.

Pressing MAIN MENU returns display to screen #xx.

3. To exit the Calibration option, press RETURN onscreen #352. Display returns to the Service modemain menu (screen #331).

5.3.1 Calibration Overview

This calibration function allows the service techni-cian to view brief explanations of the pressure andtemperature calibration methods.

1. Press CALIBRATION OVERVIEW on screen #352.

Pressing RETURN returns display to screen #331.


2. Screen #356 briefly explains the three differentmethods of calibrating the pressure probes.

Press NEXT to view the temperature calibrationmethods.

Pressing RETURN returns display to screen #352.

3. Screen #357 briefly explains the three differentmethods of calibrating temperature.

After viewing calibration methods, press RE-TURN. Display returns to screen #352.

CALIBRATION OVERVIEW 357

PREVIOUS

TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION METHODS

STEAM - Using thermocouples anda calibrated device, the low pointis obtained at ambient. Thehigh point is obtained by puttingthe respective probe in the chamberdrain and pressurizing the chamber.OIL BATH - Using a calibrated deviceand a temperature regulated oil bath,the low and high points are obtainedfor each probe.LOAD VALUES - Past calibration valuesmay be entered to obtain those pastcalibration settings.

RETURN

Pressing PREVIOUS returns display to screen #356.

5.3.2 Calibrate Temperature

The temperature can be calibrated one of three ways,either using the sterilizer’s own steam source, acalibrated oil bath (typically for factory setup orscientific accounts) or by loading in previously setcalibration values. The third method should only beused after replacing the program chips on the CPUboard.

352CALIBRATION

RETURN MAINMENU

TEMP/PRESSUNITS

CALIBRATE TEMP/PRESSTEMPERATURE VERIFICATION

CALIBRATEPRESSURE

OVERVIEW

HISTORY

352CALIBRATION

RETURN MAINMENU

TEMP/PRESSUNITS


CALIBRATEPRESSURE

OVERVIEW

HISTORY

CALIBRATION OVERVIEW 356PRESSURE CALIBRATION METHODS

STEAM - The low point (atmospheric)is obtained by opening the door.With the use of a calibratedpressure and vacuum gauge, thehigh point is obtained bypressurizing the chamber and thevacuum point by evacuation.EXTERNAL - With the use of acalibrated gauge, pressure and vacuumare applied externally to transducer.LOAD VALUES - Past calibrationvalues may be entered to obtainthose past calibrated settings.

RETURNNEXT

5-6764330-117

Select CALIBRATE TEMPERATURE at screen #352.The control advances to screen #301.

Select the calibration method at screen #301 by press-ing the appropriate touch-screen button.

A. Steam Method of CalibrationPress STEAM METHOD. The control advances toscreen #306 for the entry of the calibrator’s name.Use the keypad to enter your name, then press EN-TER.

A1. Calibrate Chamber Recorder TemperatureThe control then advances to screen #319; this screenshows the three RTDs that can be calibrated. Onlyone RTD can be calibrated at any time, select theappropriate RTD.

The control advances to screen #364. This screen

displays extremely important steps to be taken be-fore beginning any of the three RTD calibrations.Always read these instructions carefully and followall instructions before continuing with the calibra-tion.

NOTE: If the low temperature point is calibrated whilechamber is at greater than 200°F, inaccuracies in overallcalibration may occur.

NOTE: Upon entering the calibration procedure, theprevious calibration settings are printed.

319LOAD VALUES CALIBRATION

SELECT SENSOR

RETURN

CHAMBER TEMP. WASTE TEMP.

RECORDER TEMP. JACKET TEMP.

CANCEL

306CALIBRATOR'S NAME

←←←←← →→→→→

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X

Y Z SPACE

ENTERCALIBRATOR'S NAME

---------

301WARNING

TEMPERATURE CALIBRATIONWILL BE CHANGED!

CANCEL MAINMENU

STEAM

OIL BATH LOAD VALUES

364CHAMBER DRAIN TEMPERATURE

CALIBRATION

CONTINUECANCEL

CALIBRATION STEPS:

1. VERIFY CHAMBER GAUGE READS0 PRESSURE.

2. MOVE THE CHAMBER RTD IN AN AMBIENTMEDIA. DO NOT REMOVE THE WIRING FROMTHE RTD.

3. PLACE THERMOCOUPLE INTO THEAMBIENT MEDIA.

4. TO BEGIN THE LOW POINT CALIBRATIONAT AMBIENT, PRESS CONTINUE.

5-7764330-117

324CALIBRATION - VALUE ENTRY

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

000.0 F

Enter the lowtemperature valuefrom the previous chambertemperature calibration.

ENTERCANCEL

1. Control advances to screen #324, and the calibra-tion cycle begins. The sterilizer stabilizes the cham-ber RTD at the low temperature point.

Use the keypad to the right of the screen to enterthe low temperature point from the calibrateddevice, then press ENTER.

3. Control advances to calibration cycle again, un-less door(s) are open, then the control advances toscreen #365, prompting the door to be closed.Close (and lock) the door if it is presently open.Once the door is closed (or if it was already closed),

the control advances to screen #371. Follow theinstructions on the screen.

4. Sterilizer continues with calibration cycle by charg-ing to a minimum of 26 psig (1.8 Pbar) untilchamber temperature stabilizes. Once chamberpressure is stable, the control advances to screen#326 to allow entry of the high temperature point.

Enter the high temperature value from the cali-brated device, then press ENTER.

NOTE: The pressure reading during the high tempera-ture segment of this calibration procedure must reach aminimum of 26 psig (1.8 Pbar).

5. The sterilizer completes the calibration cycle. Whencomplete, the control advances to screen #366.Press CONTINUE to return to screen #319, whereanother RTD can be selected for calibration.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

000.0 F

Enter the hightemperature valuefrom the previous chambertemperature calibration.

ENTERCANCEL

371HIGH POINT CALIBRATION

CONTINUECANCEL

CALIBRATION STEPS:

1. MOVE THE RTD LOCATED IN THE AMBIENTMEDIA TO THE CHAMBER DRAIN.

2. PLACE THERMOCOUPLE INTO THE CHAMBERDRAIN.

3. TO BEGIN THE HIGH POINT CALIBRATION,PRESS CONTINUE.

THE CHAMBER WILL CHARGE WITH STEAM.

5-8764330-117

A2. Calibrate Jacket TemperatureWhen selecting JACKET TEMP, it is necessary toremove the jacket RTD from its location and place itin the chamber drain, next to the location of thecalibrated device’s thermocouple. The pipe wherethe RTD was originally located must be pluggedbefore beginning this procedure.

! WARNING – BURN HAZARD: Do not removethe jacket RTD for jacket calibration until thechamber and jacket gauges read 0 psig.

NOTE: If jacket temperature reads above 212° F thecontrol automatically exhausts the jacket. If calibrationvalues are incorrect at this point, and the actual jackettemperature is above 212° F, the jacket may fail toexhaust. Always verify chamber and jacket status withthe gauges behind the operating end service accessdoor.

1. If the door is not closed, the control advances toscreen #365 before allowing jacket calibration.Close (and lock) the door(s), if necessary. Onceclosed, control advances to screen #313, pressCONTINUE to begin the calibration procedure.

2. When the calibration procedure begins, the jacketis automatically exhausted of steam. Once ex-haust is complete, and chamber temperature isstabilized, the control advances to screen #362.Read the steps on this screen carefully and fol-low all instructions before continuing. Once allinstructions on screen #362 have been carriedout, press CONTINUE to proceed with calibra-tion.

Press CANCEL to return to the main service modemenu.

3. Control advances to calibration cycle, once thejacket RTD is stabilized, the control advances toscreen #324 to enter the low temperature valuefrom the calibrated indicator. Press ENTER toadvance to the high-point calibration cycle. Oncethe chamber reaches 26 psig (1.8 Pbar), the jacketRTD is stabilized at the peak charge point, thecontrol advances to screen #326 for entry of thehigh temperature value. Enter high temperaturevalue and press CONTINUE.

366CALIBRATION COMPLETE

PLACE THE PROBE(S) BACK TOTHEIR PROPER LOCATION.

MAKE SURE THE STERILIZER ISIN OPERATING CONDITION BEFORECONTINUING.

CONTINUE

365CLOSE THE DOOR(S)

CLOSE THE DOOR(S)

BEFORE

STARTING CYCLE.

CANCEL

362JACKET TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION STEPS:1. VERIFY CHAMBER AND JACKET GAUGES

READ 0 PRESSURE.2. REMOVE THE RTD LOCATED IN THE

CHAMBER DRAIN.3. MOVE THE JACKET RTD TO THE

CHAMBER DRAIN. DO NOT REMOVETHE WIRING FROM THE RTD.

4. PLACE THERMOCOUPLES INTO THECHAMBER DRAIN.

5. PLUG THE PIPE WHERE THE JACKETRTD WAS LOCATED.


CANCEL CONTINUE


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

362

5-9764330-117

! WARNING–BURN HAZARD! Pressure injacket must be at 0 psig before reinstallingjacket probe.

5. Press CONTINUE to return to screen #319, whereanother RTD can be selected for calibration.

NOTE: Return the jacket and chamber RTDs to theirproper locations.

A3. Calibrate Waste TemperatureWhen selecting this procedure, note that it is neces-sary to remove the waste RTD from its location andplace it in the chamber drain, next to the location ofthe calibrated indicator’s thermocouple. The pipewhere the RTD was originally located must beplugged before beginning this procedure.

1. The control advances to screen #363. Read thesteps on this screen carefully and follow all in-structions before continuing. Once all instruc-tions on screen #363 have been carried out, pressCONTINUE to proceed with waste temperaturecalibration.

Press CANCEL to return to the main service modemenu.

2. Control advances to calibration cycle, unlessdoor(s) are open. If doors are open, control ad-vances to screen #365, prompting the door to beclosed. Close (and lock) the door, if necessary.Once the door is closed (or if it was already closed),the control advances to calibration cycle.

3. Once the waste RTD is stabilized, the controladvances to screen #324 to enter the low tempera-ture value from the calibrated indicator. PressENTER to proceed to the high-point calibrationcycle.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

363WASTE TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION STEPS:1. VERIFY THE CHAMBER GAUGE READS

0 PRESSURE.2. REMOVE THE RTD LOCATED IN THE

CHAMBER DRAIN.3. MOVE THE WASTE RTD TO THE

CHAMBER DRAIN. DO NOT REMOVETHE WIRING FROM THE RTD.

4. PLACE THERMOCOUPLES INTO THECHAMBER DRAIN.

5. PLUG THE PIPE WHERE THE WASTERTD WAS LOCATED.


CANCEL CONTINUE


CONTINUE



4. The sterilizer completes the calibration cycle.When complete, the control advances to screen#366.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

4. Chamber pressure must reach 26 psig (1.8 Pbar).Once the waste RTD is stabilized at the peakcharge point, the control advances to screen #326for entry of the high temperature value. Once thisvalues is entered, press ENTER to proceed.

5-10764330-117

4. Once the door is closed (or if it was already closed),the control advances to calibration cycle.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

5. The control completes the calibration cycle. Whencomplete, the control advances to screen #366.Press CONTINUE to return to main service modemenu.

NOTE: Return the waste and chamber RTDs to theirproper locations.

B. Oil Bath Method of CalibrationThis method is used when calibrating RTDs in thefactory, or when qualifying scientific units in thefield. The oil bath method is not normally used forfield calibration of Healthcare sterilizers.

1. When any method of calibration is selected, thecontrol advances to screen #306 for the entry ofthe calibrator’s name. Use the keypad to enteryour name, then press ENTER.

2. The control advances to screen #302. This screenshows the three RTDs that can be selected forcalibration. One, two, or all three RTDs can beselected for calibration at one time. Note the cham-ber and recorder RTD’s are calibrated simulta-neously during Chamber Temperature calibra-tion. Select the RTDs to be calibrated by pressingthe appropriate touch-screen pad on the display.Selected RTD names are shown followed by theword “YES”; when deselected, the RTD name isfollowed by “NO”. Press CONTINUE once RTDsare selected.

3. Control advances to calibration cycle, unlessdoor(s) are open. If doors are open, control ad-vances to screen #365, prompting the door to beclosed. Close (and lock) the door, if necessary.

302SELECT PROBES TO CALIBRATE

PROBE(S) SELECTED:

CHAMBER TEMPERATURE = YES

JACKET TEMPERATURE = YES

WASTE TEMPERATURE = YES

CONTINUE MAINMENUCANCEL




CONTINUE


←←←←← →→→→→

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X

Y Z SPACE


---------


CLOSE THE DOOR(S)

BEFORE

STARTING CYCLE.

CANCEL

5-11764330-117

! WARNING–BURN HAZARD! Do not removethe jacket RTD for jacket calibration untilthe chamber and jacket gauges read zero.

5. The sterilizer depressurizes the chamber jacketand piping and advances to screen #303. Verifythat chamber and jacket are at zero pressure byobserving gauges. Once pressure is at zero, re-move the RTDs to be calibrated from the piping.Place selected RTDs in the low temperature oilbath and press CONTINUE.

305HIGH POINT CALIBRATION

CONTINUE

PLACE THE PROBE(S)IN A HIGH TEMPERATURE

OIL BATH.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

303TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION

VERIFY CHAMBER AND JACKETGAUGES READ 0 PRESSURE.

PLACE PROBE(S) SELECTED INLOW TEMPERATURE OIL BATH.

CANCEL CONTINUE


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

6. Sterilizer advances into calibration cycle and sta-bilizes RTDs at low temperature point. Once sta-bilized, control advances to screen #324. Use thekeypad to enter the low temperature value fromthe oil bath display, then press ENTER.

7. Control advances to screen #305. Remove RTDsfrom low temperature bath and place in hightemperature bath, then press CONTINUE.

8. The control advances into the calibration cycle,until the RTDs are stabilized at the high tempera-ture point, then advances to screen #326. Enter thehigh temperature value from the oil bath display,and press ENTER.

5-12764330-117


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL


CONTINUE



9. At screen #366, you are instructed to return allRTDs to their original locations. Replace all RTDs,and press CONTINUE.

10. The display then returns to the main servicemode menu.

C. Load Values Method of TemperatureCalibration

This calibration method is used to load previouslyset values into the control memory. This methodonly needs be used as a “correction” followingreplacement of the program chips on the CPU board.

IMPORTANT: All previously set calibration values areprinted when entering this procedure.


2. Control advances to screen #319, press the touch-screen button for the appropriate RTD to be cali-brated.

3. Control advances directly to screen #324 (i.e., nocalibration cycle); enter the low temperature valueand press ENTER.

4. The control then advances directly to screen #325for raw data entry. Raw data is a hexadecimalvalue; enter this value from printout and pressENTER.

5. Following entry of the low value raw data, thecontrol advances to screen #326 for entry of thehigh temperature value. Enter the value from theprintout and press ENTER.


+ –

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW RAW VALUE

+00000

Enter the rawdata value from the previouschambertemp. calibration.

ENTERCANCEL

319LOAD VALUES CALIBRATION

SELECT SENSOR

CANCEL

CHAMBER TEMP. WASTE TEMP.

RECORDER TEMP. JACKET TEMP.

RETURN


←←←←← →→→→→

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X

Y Z SPACE


---------

5-13764330-117


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

000.0 F


ENTERCANCEL

6. Control advances directly to screen #327 ofentry of high temperature raw data. Raw data isa hexadecimal value; enter this value from theprintout and press ENTER.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH RAW VALUE

000

Enter the rawdata value from the previouschambertemp. calibration.

ENTERCANCEL

7. The control advances to screen #320. Compare thedisplayed values with those on the printout. Verifythat they match. If the values do not match theprintout, press the value that does not match andenter the value again. If the values match theprintout, press RETURN to advance to screen#319.

5.3.3 Pressure Calibration

Pressure calibration can be accomplished either us-ing the sterilizer’s own steam source, using an exter-nal vacuum/pressure device or by loading in previ-ously set values. Field calibration is typically accom-plished using the steam method. The external methodis used for scientific accounts. Loading previouslyset values is only used when replacing the programchips on the CPU board.

This procedure requires the use of a calibrated de-vice (e.g., compound gauge or Heise gauge). Eitherdevice must be connected to the fitting adjacent tothe pressure transducer. Calibration values enteredinto the control must be observed on the calibrateddevice.

1. At screen #352, press “Calibrate Pressure.”

2. The control advances to screen #312. At thisscreen, select “Steam,” “External” or “Load Val-ues” method of calibration.

320LOAD VALUES – CHAMBER TEMP.

LOW VALUE = 000.0 F

LOW RAW DATA = 000

HIGH VALUE = 000.0 F

HIGH RAW DATA = 000

RETURN

352CALIBRATION

MAINMENU

TEMP/PRESSUNITS


CALIBRATEPRESSURE

OVERVIEW

HISTORY

312WARNING

PRESSURE CALIBRATIONWILL BE CHANGED!

CANCEL

STEAM

EXTERNAL LOAD VALUES

MAINMENU

5-14764330-117

367ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE CALIBRATION

OPEN THE CHAMBER DOORTO BEGIN THE PRESSURE

CALIBRATION OF THE ATMOSPHERICPRESSURE POINT.

CANCEL


←←←←← →→→→→

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X

Y Z SPACE


---------


4. The chamber door must be open to initiate thepressure calibration procedure. This establishes alow pressure reference point. If the door is notopen, screen #367 appears on the display.

A. Steam Method of Pressure Calibration1. Open the door (if it is not already open). The

control automatically advances to the calibra-tion cycle.

2. Once the atmospheric reference point has beenestablished, the control advances to screen #365.

3. Close the door. The control advances to screen#313. Press CONTINUE and the control advancesto the calibration cycle (screen #304).


CLOSE THE DOOR(S)

BEFORE

STARTING CYCLE.

CANCEL

313PRESSURE CALIBRATION

START CALIBRATION.

THE CHAMBER WILL PRESSURIZEWITH STEAM.

CANCEL CONTINUE

5-15764330-117


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

VACUUM VALUE

00.00 inHg

Enter the vacuumvalue from thecalibrated gauge.

ENTERCANCEL


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

00.00 psig

Enter the highpressure valuefrom the previouschamber pressurecalibration.

ENTERCANCEL

4. The control advances to screen #304 while thechamber charges with steam to achieve a peakpressure point. The chamber must reach a mini-mum of 26 psig (1.8 Pbar) before the pressuretransducer becomes stabilized.

5. Once chamber pressure is stabilized, the controladvances to screen #338. Enter the pressure valueshown on the calibrated gauge (compound orHeise) and press ENTER.

7. The control advances to screen #304, and com-pletes the calibration cycle. When complete, thecontrol advances to the main service mode menu.

B. External Method of Pressure CalibrationThis method of calibration requires that the pressuretransducer be removed from its location and beplaced in an external vacuum/pressure pump. Thispump is used to set the pressure and vacuum levelsrequired for calibration.


6. The sterilizer then advances to screen #304 whilethe chamber evacuates to a vacuum point of atleast 20 inHg. Once vacuum is achieved, thecontrol advances to screen #340. Enter thevacuum point from the calibrated gauge (com-pound or Heise) and press ENTER.

2. The control advances to screen #361. Set the exter-nal device to atmospheric, then press CONTINUE.

361PRESSURE CALIBRATION

USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICESET THE PRESSURE TRANSDUCERTO THE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE.

CANCEL CONTINUE


←←←←← →→→→→

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X

Y Z SPACE


---------

5-16764330-117


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

00.00 psig

Enter the highpressure valuefrom the calibrateddevice.

ENTERCANCEL


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

00.00 psig

Enter the lowpressure valuefrom the calibrateddevice.

ENTERCANCEL

3. The control advances to the calibration cycle andstabilizes the pressure transducer.

4. Once stabilized, the control advances to screen#336. Enter the low pressure value from the exter-nal device and press ENTER.

5. The control advances to the calibration cycle tostabilize the pressure transducer at the high pres-sure point. The control requires a minimum of 26psig and of 30 seconds to stabilize the transducerto a tolerance to ±1 psig.

6. Once stabilized, the control advances to screen#338 for entry of the high pressure value. Enterthe value from the calibrated external device andpress ENTER.

7. The control advances to the calibration cycle, sta-bilizing the transducer at the vacuum point. Thecontrol requires a minimum of 30 seconds to sta-bilize the transducer to a tolerance to ±2 inHg.Once stabilized, the control advances to screen#340. Enter the vacuum point values from thecalibrated external device and press ENTER.

8. The control then completes the calibration. Re-place the pressure transducer in its proper loca-tion.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

VACUUM VALUE

00.00 inHg

Enter the vacuumvalue from thecalibrated gauge.

ENTERCANCEL

5-17764330-117

C. Load Values Method of PressureCalibration

This method is used to load previously set valuesinto the control memory. This method only needs beused as a “correction” following replacement of theprogram chips on the CPU board.

IMPORTANT: All previously set calibration values areprinted when entering this procedure.



1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW RAW DATA

000

Enter the rawdata value from the previouschamberpress. calibration.

ENTERCANCEL

2. Control advances to screen #336. Enter the lowtemperature value and press ENTER.

3. The control then advances directly to screen #337for raw data entry. Raw data is a hexadecimalvalue; enter this value and press ENTER.

4. Following entry of the low value raw data, thecontrol advances to screen #338 for entry of thehigh temperature value. Enter the value from theprintout and press ENTER.

5. The control advances directly to screen #339 forentry of high temp raw data. Raw data is a hexa-decimal value; enter this value and press ENTER.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH VALUE

00.00 psig

Enter the highpressure valuefrom the previouschamber pressurecalibration.

ENTERCANCEL


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

HIGH RAW DATA

000

Enter the rawdata value from the previouschamberpress. calibration.

ENTERCANCEL


←←←←← →→→→→

A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X

Y Z SPACE


---------


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

LOW VALUE

00.00 psig

Enter the lowpressure valuefrom the previouschamber pressurecalibration.

ENTERCANCEL

5-18764330-117

6. Following entry of the high value raw data, thecontrol advances to screen #341 for entry of thevacuum multiplier. Enter the value from the print-out and press ENTER.

7. The control advances to screen #323. Compare thedisplayed values with those on the printout. Verifythat they match. If the values do not match theprintout, press the value that does not match andenter the value again. If the values match theprintout, press RETURN to advance to screen#319.

5.3.4 Temperature/Pressure Units

To select the temperature and pressure units usedfor display and printouts by the sterilizer, selectCALIBRATION at screen #331, the control advancesto screen #352. Press TEMP/PRESS UNITS, the con-trol advances to screen #349.

At screen #349, press PRESSURE or TEMPERATUREas appropriate. If PRESSURE is selected, the controladvances to screen #311. If TEMPERATURE is se-lected, the control advances to screen #300.

A. Pressure UnitsThe currently selected unit is shown at the top ofscreen #311, just beneath the screen title. Press theappropriate pressure unit and the screen returns toscreen #352.

psig/inHg – Pounds per square inch, gauge is usedfor positive pressure and in of mercury is used forvacuum.

bar gauge – This is a scientific measurement. BarGauge is used for both positive and negative pres-sure.

psia – Pounds per square inch, absolute pressuremeasurement. Psia values are more constant thanthe psig/inHg values, since they reference a con-stant value of 0 pressure (29.9 inHg), whereas, thepsig/inHg values reference an ever changing value,that is, 0 psig (atmospheric pressure). Since the psiavalues are constant, some scientific customers preferthem over psig/inHg values.

bar absolute – This is a scientific measurement. It isalways referenced to absolute vacuum. Bar Gauge isused for both positive and negative pressure.

349TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE UNITS

PRESSURE

TEMPERATURE

MAINMENUCANCEL

311PRESSURE UNITSBAR ABSOLUTE

PSIG/INHG PSIA

BAR GAUGE BAR ABSOLUTE

CANCEL

323LOAD VALUES - PRESSURE

LOW VALUE = 00.0 psig

LOW RAW DATA = 000

HIGH VALUE = 00.0 psig

HIGH RAW DATA = OOO

VAC MUL = 0.00

RETURN


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

VACUUM MULTIPLIER

0.00

Enter the vacuummultiplier from the previouspressurecalibration.

ENTERCANCEL

5-19764330-117

B. Temperature UnitsThe currently selected unit is shown at the top ofscreen #300, just beneath the screen title. Press theappropriate temperature unit and the screen returnsto screen #352.

Fahrenheit – Typically used for Healthcare accounts.

Celsius – Typically used for scientific accounts, oraccounts outside the U.S.A.

5.3.5 Temperature/Pressure Verification

To access this screen, press TEMP/PRESS VERIFI-CATION at screen #352, the control advances toscreen #310.

Screen #310 is used to determine if the currently setcalibration values are accurate. Using this screeneffectively requires that a calibrated device be usedfor reference. A calibrated pressure gauge (com-pound or Heise) must be connected to the chamberport adjacent to the pressure transducer. A cali-brated device, such as a Trendicator or Pyrometer,must also be used to reference temperature.

300TEMPERATURE UNITS

FAHRENHEIT

CELSIUS

FAHRENHEIT

CANCEL

348CALIBRATION HISTORY

1. PRESSURE12/23/93 NAME





RETURNHISTORYPRINT

MAINMENU

! WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Depressurizejacket before removing jacket RTD. Alwaysverify that chamber and jacket pressure is at0 psig by observing the jacket and pressuregauges behind the front access door.

1. To verify RTD calibration, remove RTD from itsnormal location and place in a hot water bath,along with the thermocouple from the calibrateddevice. The temperature readings from the cali-brated device and the sterilizer display shouldread within 1/2°. Recalibrate the sterilizer, if nec-essary.

2. Press CAL. DATA PRINT to create a printout ofall calibration values. This data is the calibratedhex data which may be used when using theLOAD DATA method of calibration.

3. Press STATUS PRINT to get a current reading oftemperature and pressure sensors.

5.3.6 Calibration History

To access this screen, press HISTORY at screen #352,the control advances to screen #348.

The last five calibration routines are shown on thisscreen. The name of the person performing the cali-bration is shown (if this information was input tocontrol memory), as well as which component wascalibrated.

The calibration history list can be printed by press-ing HISTORY PRINT.

310VERIFY CALIBRATION

SENSORS------------------------------------------------------------------------CHAMBER PRESSURE = 0.0 inHgCHAMBER CONTROL TEMP = 200.0 FCHAMBER RECORD TEMP = 200.0 FJACKET TEMPERATURE = 269.0 FWASTE TEMPERATURE = 92.6 F

VERIFY THESE SENSOR READINGS WITH THE CALI-BRATED REFERENCE

RETURNCAL. DATAPRINT

STAUSPRINT

5-20764330-117

5.4 INPUT/OUTPUT TESTS

Input/Output tests are accessed from the main ser-vice mode menu, screen #331, by pressing INPUT/OUTPUT TESTS. These tests are used to verify theoperation of solenoid valves and limit switchesthrough the sterilizer control. All activations can beverified by observing LEDs on the I/O board, andindicators on the display.

NOTE: Screen shows double power door unit equippedwith all possible standard scientific options.

The current chamber and jacket temperatures, andchamber pressure are shown to aid in evaluating thesterilizer’s performance.

• OPEN DOOR/CLOSE DOOR can be used to con-trol the door (on power door sterilizers).

• STATUS PRINT can be used to printout the cur-rent temperature and pressure conditions in thechamber and jacket.

• Press RETURN to exit this test.

The indicators on the display are defined as follows:

NOTE: 1) The steam-to-chamber valve cannot be acti-vated unless the door seal is pressurized. The steam-to-seal valve (for pressurizing the door seal) cannot beactivated unless the door is closed*. 2) The limit switchesinstantly to switch activation, expect an approximate 1/2second delay.

Limit Switches

CS1 = Chamber float switch. Normally Closed; opensduring flooded condition.

PS1 = Operating end door seal pressure switch. Openwhen unsealed, closed when sealed.

PS2 = Non-operating end door seal pressure switch.Open when unsealed, closed when sealed.

LS1 = Door A closed.LS2 = Door B closed.LS3 = Door A closed #2 – hinge doors

Door A open – sliding doors.LS4 = Door B closed #2 – hinge doors

Door B open – sliding doors.

Solenoid Valves:

S01 = Air BreakS02 = Steam to Chamber*S03 = Chamber Drain ValveS04 = Cooling Water Valve (high flow)S07 = Vacuum Water ValveS08 = Steam to Chamber (Isothermal Only)S09 = Steam to JacketS35 = Steam to Operating End Door Seal*S36 = Steam to Non-operating End Door Seal (Double

Door Only)*S37 = Operating End Seal ExhaustS38 = Non-operating End Seal Exhaust (Double Door

Only)S40 = Dual Exhaust (Liquids Cooling)S43 = Vacuum pump drain valveS46 = Cooling water valve (low flow)*These valves will show activation on the display and onthe I/O board LEDs, but because of the switched neutraldesign, the valves will not actuate.

NOTE: Units that do not have options (e.g., MR1, VR1,etc.), will not show them on the display.

STERIS SERVICE MODE: 330INPUT/OUTPUT STATUS 00:00:00 AM



ADJUSTMENTS


RETURN MAINMENU

CHANGEVALUES

CHAMBER PRESSURE = 0.0 inHgCHAMBER CONTROL TEMP = 200.0 FCHAMBER RECORD TEMP = 200.0 FJACKET TEMPERATURE = 269.0 FWASTE TEMPERATURE = 92.6 FCS1 PS1 PS3 LS1 LS3

C O C C OC = CLOSED O = OPEN

S01 S02 S03 S04OFF OFF OFF OFFS07 S09OFF OFFS35 S37OFF OFFS40 S43 S46OFF OFF OFF

SERVICEMAIN MENU

STATUSPRINT

CLOSEDOOR

OPENDOOR

5-21764330-117

5.5 ADJUSTMENTS

This part of the service mode is used to make main-tenance adjustments to the sterilizer. These tests areintended to be used when verifying the sterilizer’soperation. It may be necessary to use these adjust-ments after replacing a component.

Access adjustments by pressing ADJUSTMENTS atscreen #331, the control advances to screen #321.

5.5.1 Safety Valve Tests

This adjustment is used to verify the pressureadjustment and to verify the operation of thesafety valve. Begin this test by pressing SAFETYVALVE TEST/REGULATOR SET at screen #321.

! WARNING–Burn Hazard: Depressurize thesterilizer’s jacket before removing the jacketgauge. Verify the jacket pressure is at 0 psigbefore removing the jacket pressure gauge.

The control advances to screen #317. Read the in-structions on the screen carefully, and follow themclosely in the order shown.

Press RETURN to end this test.

5.5.2 Door Sensor Adjustments

This procedure is used to adjust the proximityswitch for the “door closed” sensor.

Access this adjustment by pressing DOOR SEN-SOR ADJUSTMENTS at screen #321. The controladvances to screen #316. Read the instructionson the screen before attempting the test.

NOTE: The control sounds a pulsing tone whenever thedoor limit switch is actuated during this test.



RETURN MAINMENU



ADJUSTMENTS CHANGEVALUES

5.5.3 Door Pressure Settings

This procedure is used to verify adjustments of thedoor pressure switches (PS1 and PS2).

Access this adjustment by pressing DOOR PRES-SURE SETTING at screen #321. The control advancesto screen #368. Read the instructions on the screenbefore attempting the test.


5.5.4 Leak Test

This is a standard leak test, and is used to verify theintegrity of the sterilizer piping.

Access the test by pressing LEAK TEST at screen#321. The control advances to the standard LeakTest. Once complete, the control returns to screen#321.

If the control is not properly calibrated, screen #19appears on the display.

19CONTROL NOT CALIBRATED

THE CONTROL HAS NOT BEEN FULLYCALIBRATED AFTER A MEMORY LOSS

CONDITION. PLEASE CONTACT AQUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN TO

HAVE THE UNIT CALIBRATED.

OVERRIDEAND

BEGINCYCLE

CANCELCYCLE

SELECT

STERIS SERVICE MODE: 368PS1 (PS2) SETTING

RETURN

SET DOOR SEAL PRESSURE SWITCH:1. Install pressure gauge at pluggedtee adjacent to door seal pressureswitch you are adjusting (DD unitshave two switches).2. Close doors.3. Press start test.4. Automatically S35 (and S36 if DD) pulse on/off.5. Adjust switch so that switch actuates at 10 psig.6. If double door unit, move gaugeto NOE end and adjust switch inthe same manner.

STARTTEST

5-22764330-117

Status:

Rb = Rebuild

Rp = Replace

Reason:

Pm = Activity due to standard preventivemaintenance

Fa = Activity due to a valve or seal failure

To use screen #346, press the touch-screen button onthe left with the appropriate valve designation (e.g.,for Steam to Chamber Valve, press “S02”). The se-lected screen button is then highlighted.

Once selected, enter the appropriate procedure bypressing one of the touch-screen buttons on the rightof the screen.

Press RETURN to exit this screen.

5.6.2 View Valve Actuation History

This screen displays the total number of times valvesand door seals have been turned on since last ser-viced.

Access this screen by pressing VIEW VALVE AC-TUATION HISTORY at screen #350. The displayadvances to screen #353.

350VALVE HISTORY

RETURN MAINMENU

VIEW VALVEACTUATION

HISTORY

VIEW VALVECYCLE COUNT

HISTORY

VALVE SERVICE

5.6 VALVE HISTORY

These screens and procedures are used to maintain aservice history for the sterilizer and its components.This history is primarily intended to track the usageand servicing of door seals and solenoid valves inthe piping manifolds.

Access these screens by pressing VALVE HISTORYat screen #331. The control advances to screen #350.

5.6.1 Valve Service

This screen is used by the technician to log in servicehistory. Access this screen by pressing VALVE SER-VICE at Screen #350, the control advances to screen#346.

Each of the touch-screen buttons to the left of thescreen represent a solenoid valve or a door seal.When the component has been serviced (and theservice procedure logged in), one or more codes aredisplayed within the button. If the component hasnever been serviced, the button should be blank,aside from its designation (e.g., “S02”).


RETURN MAINMENU




353VIEW CYCLE COUNT HISTORY

VALVE COUNT STATUS REASON DATE

S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1

RETURNMOREVALVES

PRINTLOG

Rb = REBUILD Rp = REPLACEPm = MAINT. Fa = FAILURE

S01 S02 S03 S04RbPm RbPm RbPm RbPm



S40 S43 S46RbPm RbPm RbPm

SEAL SEALA B

RbPm RbPm

346VALVE SERVICE

RETURN

STATUSREBUILDREPLACE

REASONPREVENT.

MAINT.FAILURE

5-23764330-117

Valve = Valve designation.

Turn On = The number of times the valve or seal hasbeen turned on since it was last serviced.

Status = The last service procedure performed onthe valve or seal (i.e., Rebuild or Replace).

Reason = The reason the valve or seal was lastserviced (i.e., Preventive Maintenance or Fail-ure).

Date = Date of last service procedure.

Press MORE VALUES to show any valves notcurrently displayed.

Press PRINT LOG to create a printout of the valveactuation history.

5.6.3 View Valve Cycle Count History

This screen displays the total number of cycles on thevalves and door seals since last serviced.

Access this screen by pressing VIEW VALVE COUNTHISTORY at screen #350. The display advances toscreen #353.

Valve = Valve designation.

Count = The number of cycles the valve or seal hasbeen activated since it was last serviced.

Status = The last service procedure performed onthe valve or seal (i.e., Rebuild or Replace).

Reason = The reason the valve or seal was lastserviced (i.e., Preventive Maintenance or Fail-ure).

Date = Date of last service procedure.

Press MORE VALVES to show any valves not cur-rently displayed.

Press PRINT LOG to create a printout of the valvecycle count history.

353VIEW CYCLE COUNT HISTORY

VALVE COUNT STATUS REASON DATE

S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1

RETURNMOREVALVES

PRINTLOG

PUSHBUTTONTEST

BATTERYSAVER

CONFIGUREMACHINE

351ALARM AND MAINTENANCE CONTROL

RETURN MAINMENU


RETURN MAINMENU



ADJUSTMENTS

5.7 ALARM MAINTENANCE

These screens are used to review the alarm history ofthe sterilizer. The last four cycles are retained in thesterilizer’s memory. The entire library of alarmscreens can also be accessed and viewed under thisfunction.

To access this screen, press ALARM MAINTE-NANCE at screen #331. The control advances toscreen #351.

5.7.1 Alarm List

Access this list by pressing ALARM LIST at screen#351. The control advances to screen #342 displayingalarms 1 through 8. Press MORE ALARMS to dis-play alarms 9 through 16. Then press MOREALARMS to display alarms 17 through 23. PressPREVIOUS to back up one screen. Press RETURN toreturn to screen #351.

Refer to Operating Instructions for an explanation ofindividual alarms.

CHANGEVALUES

ALARM LIST

ALARM LOG

SHOW SCREENS

5-24764330-117

345SCREENS TO VIEW

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

ENTERCANCEL

SCREEN NUMBER

000

The screen numbermay be obtained fromthe list alarmssection. However,any valid screennumber may be entered. Pressanywhere on the screen to return.

NOTE: Any screen number known can be entered here,not just alarm screens.

Once the called-up screen appears on the display,press anywhere on the display screen to return toscreen #351.

NOTE: If screen is a two part screen (as are most alarmscreens) touching the screen anywhere once advancesto the second screen in the set. Pressing the display asecond time returns the control to screen #351.

5.7.4 Pushbutton Test

This screen is used to verify that the touch screen isworking correctly.

To access this screen, press PUSHBUTTON TEST atscreen #351. The control advances to the push buttontest. This test screen has no screen number.

The pushbutton test functions by touching any of thenumbered squares shown. If the screen pushbuttonis working correctly, the area of the display shouldbecome highlighted as long as pressure is applied toit.

Press EXIT to return to screen #351.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 EXIT

342LIST ALARMS

RETURN

ALARM SCREEN1. CHAMBER TEMP. FAILURE #211 (2)2. DOOR SWITCH FAILURE #237 (2)3. DOOR UNSEALED #207 (2)4. EXHAUST RATE TOO FAST #241 (2)5. EXHAUST RATE TOO SLOW #243 (2)6. JACKET TEMP. FAILURE #213 (2)7. OVER STERILIZE TEMP. #235 (2)8. PRESSURE IN CHAMBER #221 (2)

ALARMPRINT

MOREALARMS

5.7.2 Alarm Log

This screen is used to view any alarms that occurredin the last four cycles run.

Access this screen by pressing ALARM LOG at screen#351. The screen advances to screen #358. The lasttwo cycles and their alarms are shown on this screen.To view the previous two cycles, press MORE CYCLES.

• The name and date of each cycle is shown.

• The type and time is shown for each alarm occur-rence.

• If a printout of any of the four available cycles isrequired, press the CYCLE # PRINT with theappropriate cycle number.

Press RETURN to return to screen #351.

5.7.3 Show Screens

The text of each alarm screen can be displayed on thecontrol.

To call up a specific screen, first reference the screennumber and title on screen #342, #343 or #344. Re-turn to screen 351 and press SHOW SCREENS. Thecontrol advances to screen #345. Enter the alarmscreen number using the keypad to the left of thescreen, then press ENTER.

RETURN

358ALARM LOG

1. PREVACALARMALARMALARMALARMALARMALARM

2. PREVACALARMALARMALARMALARMALARMALARM

CYCLE 1 CYCLE 2 MOREPRINT PRINT CYCLES

5-25764330-117

5.7.5 Battery Saver

This screen can be used to shut off the control systemRAM battery when the sterilizer is placed in ex-tended storage.

NOTE: If the battery has been “saved,” the clock turnsoff whenever the sterilizer is turned off. If will be neces-sary to reset the clock (time and date) if the battery hasbeen saved then restored to operation.

To access this screen, press BATTERY SAVER atscreen #351. The control advances to screen #359.Read the screen carefully before proceeding.

• Press YES to save the battery. The control returnsto screen #351.

• Press NO to return to screen #351 without savingthe battery.

359BATTERY SAVER

THE BATTERY SAVER WILL TURNTHE BATTERY OFF. THE CHANGE

VALUES PARAMETERS WILL BE LOSTWHEN THE POWER IS TURNED OFF.

ARE YOU SURE YOU WISHTO TURN THE BATTERY OFF?

YES NO

5.7.6 Configure Machine

These screens are used to setup the machine, desig-nating chamber size, door type, presence of a gen-erator, other optional equipment and serial number.

Access this screen by pressing CONFIGURE MA-CHINE at screen #351. The control advances to screen#329. At screen #329, select whether you wish tochange the control system configuration or down-load a new program into the system.

• Press SET CONFIGURATION to change the sys-tem configuration.

329CONFIGURE MACHINE

SET CONFIGURATION

RETURN

5.7.6.1 Set Configurations

To set the configuration, press CONFIGURE MA-CHINE at screen #351. The control advances to screen#500. At screen #500, set sterilizer size and sterilizerdoor arrangement.

Once the options on screen #500 have been selected,press CONTINUE. If a hinge door arrangement hasbeen selected, the control will advance to screen#507. If a sliding door arrangement has been se-lected, the control will advance to screen #506.

STERIS SERVICE MODE: 500STERILIZER CONFIGURATION

CONTINUE

SELECTSIZE

26X37X36

26X37X48

26X37X60

SELECTDOOR

SINGLEHINGE DOOR

DOUBLEHINGE DOOR

SINGLESLIDING DOOR

DOUBLESLIDING DOOR


CONTINUE

OE DOOR OPEN DIRECTION

LEFT RIGHT

5-26764330-117


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

<- 0 ->

RETURN

ENTER SERIAL NUMBER

0000000-00

Screen #503 is used to enter the serial number of thesterilizer. Enter the number using the key pad to theright of the screen.

Once the number is complete and correct, pressENTER, the control returns to the main servicemode menu.

5.8 CHANGE VALUES

The CHANGE VALUES selector in the service modeis common to both Healthcare and scientific steriliz-ers. Note that many cycle set up values for scientificunits are not found in the Service Mode, rather theyare available under the different menu selectionsfound only on scientific units.

The Healthcare version sterilizer limits the ability toadjust cycle parameters since the unit is a medicaldevice.

To access CHANGE VALUES, press the appropriatetouch pad on screen #331.

Screen #355 will be displayed, allowing adjustmentof the Cycle Count and Run Time. When adjust-ments have been made, screen #614 will be dis-played.


RETURN MAINMENU




Screen #506 is used to select the door direction for asliding door machine. If the OE door opens to theleft, select LEFT. If the OE door opens to the right,select RIGHT. Press CONTINUE.

The control advances to screen #507.

Screen #507 is used to select a PREVAC sterilizer oran SFPP sterilizer. Press PREVAC STERILIZER if themachine is a vacamatic sterilizer or press SFPP STER-ILIZER if the machine is a steam flush pressure pulsesterilizer. Press CONTINUE.



CONTINUE

STERILIZER TYPE SELECTION

PREVACSTERILIZER

SFPPSTERILIZER


NO RDSCONNECTION

UNIT CONNECTEDTO RDS

Screen #510 is used to select if the sterilizer is con-nected to an RDS* data acquisition system. Press NORDS CONNECTION if the sterilizer is not connectedto RDS. Press UNIT CONNECTED TO RDS if thesterilizer is connected to RDS.

* RDS = Reprocessing Documentation System. Availablefrom STERIS Corporation. Contact STERIS for informa-tion.


5-27764330-117

• Select PRINT SERVICE VALUES and printer willprint:

• too long in phase values

• purge time settings

• Select DEFAULT VALUES (burn-in) and controlwill restore factory default values.

NOTE: Some programs do not have Europeandefault values section.

• Select CYCLE SETTINGS and control allows ad-justment of purge time (early revision softwaredoes not have this selection available).

• Select TOO LONG IN PHASE and control allowsadjustment of too long in step alarms.

• Select STEAM ACCESS CODE and control re-moves any customer selected access codes.

• Select RS-232 INTERFACE and control allowsprinter to be interfaced with either a computer orand external printer.

614SERVICE MODE CHANGE VALUES

PRINT TOO LONGSERVICE VALUES IN PHASE

DEFAULT VALUES CLEAR(BURN-IN) ACCESS CODE

EUROPEAN RS-232DEFAULT VALUES INTERFACE

CYCLESETINGS

6-1764330-117

Section 6: Inspection and Maintenance

6.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCESCHEDULE

! WARNING–SHOCK AND BURN HAZARD: Regu-larly scheduled preventive maintenance is requiredfor safe and reliable operation of this equipment.Contact STERIS to schedule preventive mainte-nance.

Maintenance procedures described in SECTIONS 6 AND 9must be performed regularly at the indicated inter-vals, using the maintenance schedule in Table 6-1 as

a guide. Local conditions (water quality, usage, etc.)may require more frequent maintenance than indi-cated. Refer to SECTION 10, ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

for replacement parts.

Customer should maintain a record of all mainte-nance procedures performed on the sterilizer.

If a problem occurs, refer to SECTION 8, TROUBLESHOOTING.

NOTE: Never permit unqualified persons to service thesterilizer.

Table 6-1. Preventive Maintenance Schedule for Amsco®®®®®Century®®®®® Medium Sterilizer

Service Required Minimum Frequency

1.0 PREPARATION FOR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE1.1 Discuss equipment with operators and check printouts. 6x per year1.2 Follow appropriate safety procedures; prepare unit for preventive maintenance. 6x per year

2.0 DOOR ASSEMBLY (EACH DOOR ON A DOUBLE DOOR UNIT)2.1 Verify proper door and door proximity switch operation. Adjust switch(s)

if needed. 6x per year2.2 Check condition of door gasket for wear and tear. Replace as needed. 6x per year2.3 Verify proper tension on power door cable (sliding door units, only). 6x per year

3.0 VALVES3.1 Verify each hand valve operates smoothly, check valve packing for leaks, rebuild

or replace as needed.• Steam supply valve. 6x per year• Water supply valve. 6x per year• Emergency exhaust valves. 6x per year

3.2 Rebuild all solenoid valves. 1x per year3.3 Replace all check valves. 1x per year3.4 Rebuild steam control valve (PRV). 1x per year3.5 Verify that safety valve is not leaking. 6x per year3.6 Verify operation of safety valve. 1x per year3.7 Replace safety valve. A/R

6-2764330-117

Table 6-1. Preventive Maintenance Schedule for Century Medium Sterilizer

Service Required Minimum Frequency

4.0 MISC PIPING COMPONENTS4.1 Inspect steam strainer for debris, clean as needed. 1x per year4.2 Inspect water strainer for debris, clean as needed. 1x per year4.3 Inspect jacket strainer for debris, clean as needed. 1x per year4.4 Inspect chamber drain strainer for debris, clean as needed. 6x per year4.5 Replace air filter cartridge. 1x per year4.6 Chamber and jacket gauge(s) - verify proper operation. Replace if needed. 6x per year4.7 Rebuild chamber and jacket traps. 1x per year4.8 Verify that there are no leaks. 6x per year4.9 Verify that door lock piston operates correctly (hinged door models only). 6x per year

5.0 CONTROL5.1 Verify that printer and paper take-up operate properly.

Check printout for darkness, missing dots, etc. 6x per year5.2 Verify that all touch panels function properly (O.E. and N.O.E). 6x per year5.3 Verify that the date and time are correct. If not, correct. 6x per year5.4 Verify operation of the battery-backed RAM, replace as needed. 6x per year5.5 Verify that the buzzer is working. 6x per year5.6 Verify that the water level sensor operates properly. 6x per year5.7 Verify that cooling fan operates properly. 6x per year5.8 Clean fan filter. 1x per year5.9 Check all service-settable values in Service Test Mode for factory

recommended settings. Verify functional operation of each valve usingthe Service Test Mode. 1x per year

5.10 Verify temperature displays/printouts with potentiometer. 1x per year5.11 Verify pressure settings as described in Maintenance Manual. 1x per year

6.0 SAFETY TESTING6.1 Inspect ground bond. 1x per year6.2 Inspect steam connection to sterilizer. 1x per year6.3 Inspect water connection to sterilizer. 1x per year6.4 Inspect drain connection to sterilizer. 1x per year

7.0 FINAL CHECKOUT AND TEST7.1 Clean dirt and lint from components. Check all wiring, terminals, and

socket connections for damage or fraying. 6x per year7.2 Verify that unit has proper labels (caution, warning). 6x per year7.3 Run machine through each cycle to verify proper operation. Check all

displays and printouts. Note on tape: “TEST CYCLE." 6x per year7.4 Verify that the shelves slide easily in and out of the chamber, if equipped. 6x per year7.5 Reinstall any panel or cover removed. Carefully check area around sterilizer,

and remove all materials used during inspection.

6-3764330-117

6.2 CLEAN CHAMBER DRAINSTRAINER

! WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Allow sterilizer tocool to room temperature before performing anycleaning or maintenance procedures.

IMPORTANT: The chamber drain strainer must becleaned at least once a day, preferably in the morningbefore running the first cycle.

1. Remove the drain strainer from the drain in thebottom of the chamber as shown in Figure 6-1.

2. Remove any obvious debris from the strainer. Ifnecessary, clear the screen in the strainer using abrush, wire, or similar tool.

3. Once it has been cleared of obvious debris, re-verse flush the strainer under running water.

4. Replace the strainer in the chamber drain.

6.3 CLEAN CHAMBER

! WARNING–FALL HAZARD: To prevent falls,keep floors dry by immediately wiping up anyspilled liquids or condensation in sterilizer load-ing and unloading areas.

! WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Allow sterilizerto cool to room temperature before performingany cleaning or maintenance procedures.

IMPORTANT: The entire chamber should be wipeddown and rinsed following any spills or other soiling.

IMPORTANT: Chamber must be at room temperature,sterilizer off all night, before washing.

1. Wash the inside of the chamber and shelf assem-bly (plus any other loading equipment) with amild detergent solution such as STERIS Liqui-Jet®

or current STERIS equivalent. (Contact STERIS.)

! CAUTION: Never use a wire brush, abrasives,or steel wool on door and chamber assembly. Donot use cleaners containing chloride on stainless-steel surfaces. Chloride-based cleaners will dete-riorate stainless steel, eventually leading to fail-ure of the vessel.

2. Professional cleaning of the chamber on a yearlybasis (or as required due to local conditions) issuggested to maintain appearance of the cham-ber interior. Contact STERIS for information re-garding this service.

6.4 FLUSH CHAMBER DRAIN –PERFORM WEEKLY

! WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Allowsterilizer and accessories to cool to roomtemperature before performing any cleaning ormaintenance procedures.

Flush chamber drain as follows, weekly or when-ever the line becomes clogged:

1. Turn OFF steam supply valve. Wait until jacketpressure is zero. Wait until chamber has cooled toroom temperature.

2. Remove chamber drain strainer (Figure 6-1). Cleanstrainer using procedures given above, if neces-sary.

3. Pour a solution of ~1/4 cup (60 mL) of STERISLiquiJet 2 (Contact STERIS) and ~1 pint (500 mL)of hot water into the drain. Solution may puddle inthe bottom of the chamber.

4. Should the detergents in step 3 be unavailable, youmay use a hot solution of 15mL (~1 tablespoon) oftrisodium phosphate to 500 mL (~1 pint) of hotwater.

5. Open door and place strainer back in drain.

FIGURE 6-1

6-4764330-117

6.5 CHANGE PRINTER PAPER ROLL

The printer paper roll should be changed whenever acolored stripe is visible on one or both edges of theprintout paper.

1. Tear paper between take-up spool and printer. 2. Remove take-up spool from drive by inserting fin-gers in cavity as shown and pushing spool to theright.

3. Pull off right end of spool and remove used paperroll from spindle.

4. Open access door and remove old paper roll, gentlypulling any remaining tape up and out of printer.

5. Insert new paper roll.

6-5764330-117

6. Insert end of paper into printer slot just behind inkcartridge.

7. Press "PAPER FEED" touch screen pad on displayuntil paper advances through printer and ink car-tridge, exiting the front.

8. Continue pressing "PAPER FEED" (or pull papergently) until about 18" (46cm) of paper hangs outof printer. Insert end of paper into slot of take-upspool, then replace right end of spool.

6-6764330-117

9. Rotate spool in direction shown until paper issecure.

10. Reinstall take-up spool on magnetic idler. Manu-ally roll up slack paper.

6.5.1 Change Printer Ink Cartridge

The printer ink cartridge should be changed as soonas the type on printouts is light or faded, and beforeprintouts become difficult to read.

1. Tear paper between take-up spool and printer.

2. Open access door, then press on right end of inkcartridge, until left end of cartridge pops out ofthe printer.

6-7764330-117

3. Slip cartridge off end of paper , slip new cartridgeover paper in the same way as before, makingsure paper slides between ink cartridge housingand ink ribbon.

4. Install left end of cartridge first, then push rightend in as shown, snapping it into place.

5. Retighten ribbon by rotating wheel on left side ofcartridge 1/4 turn. Then see "Changing PaperRoll", steps 8 through 10 to reinstall take-up spool.

7-1764330-117

Section 7: Field Test Procedures

7.1 GENERAL

These procedures are to be used to verify operationof the sterilizer per factory specifications. If theequipment operates within theses specifications, itis considered to be operating properly. Conversely ifthe unit operates outside these specifications, it isconsidered to be operating improperly and repairsshould be performed.

7.2 TEST INSTRUMENTATIONREQUIRED

1. Calibrated test gauge (0-100 psig. +/-.5% full scaleaccuracy). One required.

2. Calibrated compound test gauge (30 inHg vacuumand 60 psig. +/-.5% full scale accuracy).

3. Stopwatch.

4. Digital voltmeter.

5. Amp meter.

7.3 INSTALLATION DATA

Plumbing Connections Pipe Size Pressure

Steam Supply 1" NPT 50-80 psig. (1)

Cold Water Supply 1" NPT 20-50 psig (1)

Waste 2" ODT

Electrical Volts Frequency Phase

Control 120 VAC 60 Hz 1

Vacuum Pump 208 VAC 60 Hz 3240 VAC480 VAC

NOTE: Pressure readings are dynamic (in operation).

7.4 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION

1. Place a level on the bottom surface of the endframe opening to level the sterilizer side-to-side.Next, place a level on the face surface of the endframe to level the sterilizer front-to-back. Levelsterilizer by adjusting leveling feet.

2. Connect 100 psig. pressure gauge to water supplystrainer. Verify dynamic water pressure.

3. Connect 100 psig. pressure gauge to steam supplystrainer. Verify dynamic steam pressure.

4. Adjust jacket and chamber pressure gauges tozero if required.

5. Measure single phase power connected to controlbox assembly, verify voltage.

6. Measure three phase power connected to vacuumpump, verify voltage.

7. Measure current draw on vacuum pump duringoperation, verify correct overload setting.

8. Verify correct vacuum pump rotation. Refer tocooling fan at end of pump. Note arrow indicatingdirection of rotation. Momentarily energize vacuumpump, either using I/O screen in service mode orwith jumper wire on vacuum pump contactor. Checkpump shaft for correct rotation.

9. Verify drain line connection is sealed and slope ofdraw line allows flow without backup.

7.5 CONTROL SETUP

This section will be used to verify the configurationof the sterilizer. Enter the Service Mode, selectAlarm/Maintenance, and select SET CONFIGURA-TION. Verify the chamber size and door configura-tion. If these are not set correctly, alarms may occur.

7.5.1 Loss of Power Test

1. Turn OFF main power supply to the unit.

2. Wait 10 seconds then turn main power supplyswitch ON.

3. Verify that a FLASH VALUES RESTORED mes-sage in NOT printed.

4. If FLASH VALUES RESTORED did print, thebattery on the Control Board must be replaced.The battery is STERIS P/N 93915-047.

7.5.2 Control Input and Wiring Check

1. Enter Service Mode and press Input/Output Tests.

Check each input, one at a time. Also, check forthe proper ON and OFF operation being shown onthe display. If any of the inputs do not changestate, check wire connections, switches, and powersupply before checking the harness.

7-2764330-117

2. Check the following inputs:

CS1 – Chamber flooded switch

PS1 – OE door seal pressure switch

PS2 – NOE door seal pressure switch

PS3 – Vacuum pump water pressure switch

LS1 – OE door closed switch (sliding door)

OE door "A" locked switch (hinge door)

LS2 – NOE door closed switch (sliding door)

NOE door "A" Locked switch (hinge door)

LS3 – OE door open switch (sliding door)

OE door "B" locked switch (hinge door)

LS4 – NOE door open switch (sliding door)

NOE door "B" Locked switch (hinge door)

LS5 – OE door lock engaged switch (hinge dooronly)

LS6 – NOE door lock engaged switch (hinge dooronly)

NOTE: Actuate CS1 by lifting the float on the switch.

PS1, PS2 and PS3 can be actuated by placing ajumper wire across the switch.

LS1, LS2, LS3, LS4, LS5 and LS6 are normallyopen inputs. They may be actuated by placing apiece of ferrous metal in front of the sensingelement.

7.5.3 Control Output and Wiring Check

1. Enter Service Mode and press Input/Output Tests.

2. OPEN sterilizer water supply at this time. DONOT OPEN the steam supply valve at this time.

3. Check each output, one at a time, by pressing thecorresponding button on the display. Verify thatthe DIN connector lights up for each valve, or thatthe pump turns on.

NOTE: Add a jumper to pressure switch(es) PS1 (PS2)to actuate S2.

S35 (S36) will not actuate unless the door(s) is(are) closed.

S7 and the vacuum pump are controlled by thesame output. Prior to checking S7 and the vacuumpump, open the sterilizer water supply. Turn theoutput ON only long enough to verify correctoperation of S7 and correct pump shaft rotation.

Check the following outputs:

S1 – Air break valve

S2 – Steam to chamber valve

S3 – Chamber drain valve

S4 – Cooling water valve

S8 – Vacuum water valve/vacuum pump

S9 – Steam to jacket valve

S35 – OE seal steam valve

S36 – NOE seal steam valve (double door only)

S37 – OE seal exhaust valve

S38 – NOE seal exhaust valve (double door only)

S40 – Dual exhaust valve

S43 – Vacuum pump drain valve

S46 – Water cooling water valve

Also, check for the proper ON and OFF operationbeing shown on the display. If any of the outputsdo not receive the signal, check wire connections,switches and power supply before checking theharness.

4. SWITCHED NEUTRAL 1 TEST: After verifyingS2 actuation, turn on S2. Remove the jumperacross pressure switch PS1. Verify that S2 closed(de-energizes).

5. SWITCHED NEUTRAL 2 (3) TEST: After verify-ing S35 (36) actuation, turn ON S35. Open door to"break" door switch. Verify S35 (36) closes (de-energizes).

6. Exit Service Mode when all outputs have beentested. Remove any jumpers used during thissection.

7.6 TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION

REFER to Section 5 Service Mode for calibration proce-dures. For Healthcare equipment, use the SteamCalibration method. For scientific equipment, useOil Bath calibration method.

7.7 PRESSURE CALIBRATION

REFER to Section 5 Service Mode for calibrationprocedures. For healthcare equipment, use the SteamCalibration method. For Scientific equipment useeither Steam or external calibration method.

7-3764330-117

7.8 DOOR ADJUSTMENT VERIFICATION

7.8.1 Hinge Door

1. Door Motion

With the door unlocked, slowly and fully openand close it several times and ensure the doormotion is smooth.

2. Door Lock Operation

With the door closed and unlocked, lock andunlock it several times and ensure the motion andforce are smooth. With a force gauge at the end ofand at right angles to the door lock lever, measurethe force to slowly lock and unlock the door.Ensure it is between 4 and 9 pounds.

Ensure when the door is fully locked that the doorlock sensor of each lock plate is activated. Adjustsensor target so the gap is 1/16" when the door isfully locked.

3. Lock Plate Lock Operation

During a cycle, lower the swing-down panel un-der the chamber door to view the lock plate lockdevice. Ensure the diaphragm cylinder and theassociated rod extends and retracts smoothly atthe start and end of the cycle. Ensure when thecylinder and rod are actuated that the gap be-tween the rod and lock plate is between 1/32" and1/8". Adjust sensor so that the gap is 1/16" whenthe cylinder is fully extended.

7.8.2 Hinge Door Adjusting Procedure

1. Refer to the assembly drawing 14660-420/437 forcomponent configuration and part numbers.Drawings in this document are for reference onlyto illustrate these adjustments.

2. Refer to the assembly drawings 146660-420/437for any fastener torque and lubrication specifica-tions related to these adjustments.

3. Unless otherwise depicted, drawings in this docu-ment are of left hand door units but are applicableto both right and left hand doors.

4. Other than the Pressure Lock Sensor Adjustment,the order of these adjustments should be in theorder in which they are presented.

5. Auxiliary assembly components required for theseadjustments are:

Component Quantity

Assembly safety bar TN-45337 1Assembly safety bar attaching screws –3/4-16 x 12 2Hinge wrench TN-45336 1Door positioning assembly screws – 3/8-16 x 2 3

A. Door Position Adjustment

1. Tighten three door positioning assembly screwsinto the end frame (3/8-16 X 2 minimum). SeeFigure 1. Two assembly screws are locatedbelow the end frame opening, the third is adja-cent to the end frame opening on the sideopposite the hinge.

2. Install the two safety-bar screws in the tappedholes in the side hooks used for the door stop.See Figure 7-1. Turn them in such that there isabout 3/8" from the underside of the screwhead to the hook.

Figure 7-1. Safety Bar and Door PositioningScrew Locations

3. Position the door plate on the two lower doorpositioning screws. See Figure 7-2.

4. With the door manually secured from tippingaway from the end frame, immediately slip thesafety bar onto the safety bar screws and tightenthe screws. This will safely maintain the doorwhile hinge assembly proceeds. See Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2. Door Contacting PositioningScrew with Safety Bar in Place

Right HandDoor Only

Left HandDoor Only

Safety Bar Screws

Left Hand & RightHand Doors

Door PositioningScrew Locations

Safety BarIn Place

Door Contacting All ThreeDoor Positioning Screws

7-4764330-117

5. Slide the door toward the third assemblyscrew until the door and screw just contact. SeeFigure 7-2.

6. With a sharp pencil, match-mark the doorto end frame opposite the hinge side. SeeFigure 7-3.

C. Upper Hinge Spring Adjustment – See Figure 7-6.

1. Ensure the safety bar is still in place.

2. With the spring components are loosely as-sembled (See assembly drawing), turn the ten-sion screw or nut so the springs are just snug.Turn the tension nut an additional 4 turns.

This compresses the spring elements 1/4".

3. Install and tighten the lock nut while ensuringthe tension screw and nut do not rotate.

Figure 7-3. Match Marks

This is to be the final position of the door.Ensure that the door remains in this positionfor the Hinge Position Adjustment.

B. Hinge Position Adjustment

Ensure the door position adjustment has beenperformed prior to starting this adjustment andthe door is in its final position by checking thematch-mark.

IMPORTANT: Perform the following adjust-ment for each door hinge.

1. Assemble hinges to the door and end framemaking the attachment screws just finger tight.

2. Prior to hinge screw tightening, engage thehinge wrench to the leaf of the hinge adjacentto the end frame. See Figure 7-5. Apply a mod-erate downward force to the wrench to removeall lash (free play) in the door/hinge/end framesystem. See Figure 7-4.

3. With the door in its final position and the forceapplied to the hinge, tighten all hinge screws(to both the door and end frame) to the torquespecified on the assembly drawing. Removethe three assembly screws.

4. Ensure the match-marks are still aligned.

Figure 7-4. Hinge Wrench Loading

Figure 7-5. Hinge Wrench Enagement

Figure 7-6. Upper Hinge Spring Adjustment(Top View)

End Frame

Match MarksDoor

Hinge Wrench Engaging HingeLeaf Adjacent to End Frame

Moderate Downward Force on Wrench During Tightening– For Upper and Lower Hinges– for Left and Right Hand Doors

Left Hand Door Right Hand Door

Safety BarIn Place

Hinge Wrench Engaging HingeLeaf Adjacent to End Frame

TensionScrew

Tension NutLock Nut

4 Turns (1/4" Ref.)

Springs Just Snug Springs Compressed

7-5764330-117

E. Hinge Set screw Adjustment – See Figure 7-8

Perform the following adjustment for each doorhinge.

1. Ensure the tip of the set screw in the center barof the hinge is recessed into the bar prior to thisadjustment.

2. Push and hold the door inward so it fullycontacts the end frame.

3. With the door in this position, advance theset screw until it just contacts the end framehinge leaf.

4. When both hinge set screws are adjusted, openthe door and close it. When fully closed, thedoor should stay fully closed - not springingback slightly - and stay flat against the endframe all around.

If the door does spring open slightly, it is likelydue to the edge of the door engaging the endframe slightly at the inner edge just before thedoor fully closes (see “*” in Figure 7-8 desig-nating the point of contact). It may also benoticeable that the hinge barrels move slightlysimultaneously. If this is the case, further setscrew adjustment is needed.

Figure 7-7. Lower Hinge Spring Adjustment(Top View)

D. Lower Hinge Spring Adjustment – See Figure 7-7.

1. With the spring components loosely assembled(See assembly drawing), turn the tension screwor nut so the springs are just snug. Turn thetension nut an additional 4 turns.

This compresses the spring elements 3/32".

2. Install and tighten the lock nut while ensuringthe tension screw and nut do not rotate.

3. Remove the door safety bar and its two screws.

4. Install the door stop. See assembly drawing.

Figure 7-8. Hinge Set Screw Adjustment (Top View)

5. First, determine which hinge set screw (possi-bly both), requires further adjustment. If thedoor pre-engages primarily at the top, adjustthe top hinge screw; if it pre-engages at thebottom, adjust the bottom hinge screw.

a. Advance the screw to be adjusted an addi-tional 1/16 turn.

b. Repeat this subsection.

6. While ensuring the set screw does not rotatefurther, tighten the set screw lock nut.

F. Final Check of Door/Hinge Adjustment

1. Fully open and close the door several times.

2. Check that the match-marks still alignwithin 1/32".

3. Check that the door, when fully closed, staysflat against the end frame and does not moveslightly in the open direction.

4. Check that the door “feel” is smooth with notight spots or unusual motions.

TensionScrew

Tension NutLock Nut

1-1/2 Turns (3/32" Ref.)

Springs Just Snug Springs CompressedLock Nut

Set Screw Tip Just Contacting Hinge Leaf

Door Against End Frame

Set Screw

End FrameHinge Leaf

7-6764330-117

G. Pressure Lock Adjustments – See Figure 7-9

Do not manually extend or rotate the cylinder rod.

1. Sensor positioning - Prior to installing the pres-sure lock assembly to the end frame, adjust thesensor so the sensing face is 1/16" from thetarget periphery.

2. Pressure lock assembly positioning - With thedoor lock plate in its fully locked position,install the pressure lock assembly to the endframe such that the gap between the extendedlock rod and the lock plate edge is 1/16". Ex-tend the lock rod manually by pushing upwardon the target pins (against the spring). Pushsufficiently to raise the lock rod adjacent to thelock plate edge — once adjacent, make themeasurement.

Figure 7-9. Pressure Lock Adjustments

Taget Pin

Lock Plate Edge

Lock Pin

1/16 Sensing Face

Target

Cylinder RodDo Not Extend

1/16 7.8.3 Sliding Door

7.8.3.1 General

1. Refer to the assembly drawing 146660-438/449for component configuration and part numbers.Drawings in this document are for reference onlyto illustrate these adjustments.

2. Refer to the assembly drawings 146660-438/449for any fastener torque and lubrication specifica-tions related to these adjustments.

3. The drawings in this document are of left handdoor units but are applicable to both right and lefthand doors.

4. Other than the Pressure Lock Sensor Adjustment,it is suggested the order of these adjustments bein the order in which they are presented here.

5. Auxiliary assembly components required for theseadjustments are:

Component Quantity

Rail Spacer Block TN-45368 2

Rail Positioning Screw – 2 3/8-16 x 3-1/4 SHCS (ex. 129359-896)

6. In this document, “right” and “left” sides of thesterilizer are referred to as “closing” and “open-ing” sides. The closing side is the side of thesterilizer that the door moves toward as it closes.Using this terminology, the text is applicable toright and left hand units.

7.8.3.2 Upper Rail Assembly and Adjustment

This instruction is to be performed prior to doorinstallation.

1. Install the upper rail elevation fasteners. SeeFigure 7-10.

A. On the closing side, fully turn in the stud andtighten the stud lock nut. Loosely assemble thejam nut and the elevation nut so the distance fromthe top of the hook to the top of the elevation nutis about 1-3/4".

B. On the opening side, tighten the elevationscrew with its locking nut loosely installed.

2. Tighten the two assembly rail positioning screwswith assembly rail spacer blocks in the recessedpads of end frame above the chamber opening.

Note: The blocks hang freely from the screws. SeeFigure 7-11.

7-7764330-117

6. Adjust the elevation fasteners.

A. Closing side

1. Advance the elevation nut up until it firmlycontacts the rail support.

2. Advance and tighten the elevation lock nutwhile ensuring the elevation nut does not ro-tate.

3. Install and tighten the top nut. See Figure 7-13.

B. Opening side

1. Rotate the elevation screw upward until itfirmly contacts the rail support.

2. Tighten the lock nut against the upper hookwhile ensuring the elevation screw does notrotate. See Figure 7-13.

3. Loosely assemble the door rail to the door railsupport using all screws.

4. Loosely assemble the door rail support assemblyto the face of the upper hook using all screws.Adjust as necessary the elevation stud nut andlock nut to ensure they do not contact the railsupport.

5. Push the rail support assembly upward so the railcontacts the two assembly screws. See Figure 7-12.

A. Tighten the rail support screws into the upperhook while in this condition. Push the rail towardthe end frame until it contacts both assemblyspacers.

B. Tighten the rail screws to the rail support whilein this condition.

Figure 7-10. Upper Rail Elevation Hardware

Figure 7-12. Upper Rail in positionFigure 7-11. Upper Rail PositioningHardware

7-8764330-117

7. Ensure the rail is in contact with the two assemblyscrews and the two assembly spacers. If there is agap at any of these four points, reposition the railsupport and rail as required.

8. Remove the two assembly rail positioning screwsand assembly rail spacers.

The rail is now secured parallel to and at thecorrect horizontal distance from the end frameface and parallel to and at the correct elevationfrom the end frame horizontal centerline.

7.8.3.3 Door Fore/Aft Follower AssembliesAdjustment

For this instruction, the following shall have beenassembled in accordance with the referencedassembly drawing:

• Door assembly (Door weldment with suspensionarms and roller hardware)

• Lower door guide bracket

• Door open and door closed hard stops

1. Setting Door Position Prior to Adjustments – See

Figure 7-13 - Elevation Fastener Adjustment and Securing

Figure 7-14

A. Position the door about one inch from beingfully closed.

B. Ensure there is approximately a 1/4" gap be-tween the tip of the set screw of each suspensionarm and the rail support.

C. Ensure the door is hanging such that its topedge is resting inward against the end frame andits lower edge is resting outward against thelower hook.

2. Upper Followers Adjustment

A. Advance the fore/aft set screw of each suspen-sion arm until they just contact the rail supportwithout disturbing the door.

B. Advance each screw an additional 5/8 turns.This draws the top edge of the door outward,away from the end frame approximately .078".See Figure 7-15.

C. Loosely attach the two upper preloadedfollower assemblies to the door channels. See

Figure 7-14. Fore/Aft Adjustment Preparation

7-9764330-117

Figure 7-15.

Figure 7-15. Upper Follower Assy in Place

D. For each upper follower assembly – positionit inward until the roller just contacts the railsupport. Keeping the rollers square to the railsupport and maintaining roller contact, tightenthe follower assembly attachment screws.

E. Check that there is no gap between the rollersand the rail support and the set screw and theguide rail. If any gaps exist, reposition the fol-lower assemblies as required.

F. Finally, turn out the fore/aft set screw of eachsuspension arm until the tip is flush with theinner edge of the suspension arm.

3. Lower Follower Nose Plunger Assembly andAdjustment.

A. Secure the lower follower bracket to the door.See Figure 7-16.

Figure 7-16. Lower Follower Hardware

B. Install and advance the two spring plungersuntil they just contact the lower rail without dis-turbing the door.

C. Advance the plungers an additional 7/8 turns.This pushes the door's lower edge inward, awayfrom the lower hook approximately .078". SeeFigure 7-17.

Figure 7-17. Lower Follower Adjustment

D. Install and tighten the lock nuts while ensur-ing the plungers do not rotate.

The door is now centered fore/aft between the hooksand the end frame.

7.8.3.4 Door Adjustment and Function Check

This section is to be done prior to door drive cableinstallation.

1. Ensure the door open and door closed hard stopsare installed.

2. Install the door lock components to the lowerhook in accordance with the referenced assemblydrawing.

3. Looking down the upper and lower edge of thedoor while pushing the door from closed to open,ensure the spacings between the door and the endframe and the door and the hooks are reasonablyuniform — both in-and-out and up-and-down —throughout the door traverse.

4. Manually roll the door open and closed severaltimes and ensure:

A. The suspension arm rollers roll smoothly.

B. The upper follower rollers roll smoothly.

7-10764330-117

C. The lower follower nose plunger slidessmoothly.

D. The spring loaded lower follower nose plungernose does not retract into the body when the dooris at rest or while traversing.

E. No part of the door lock components come incontact with the door when the door is at rest orwhile traversing.

7.8.3.5 Door Drive Cable Tension Adjustment

For this adjustment, the door drive cable is tensionedto attain a specified door close stall force.

1. Tension Adjustment

A. Ensure the unit is level and door motor powerand door control is available.

B. Adjust the door drive cable tension nut so thereis moderate cable tension. The lock nut may bekept loose. See Figures 7-18 and 7-19.

C. Measure and set the stall force - With the doorabout half way open, position a force gauge hori-zontally at an elevation of approximately thehorizontal centerline of the door such that the“ground” end of the gauge bears on the end frameopening and the sensing end of the gage in theplane of the door. See Figure 7-20. Ensure thedoor is open enough that there is at least fourinches between the closing edge of the door andthe sensing end of the gauge. Power the door inthe closing direction and let it engage the gaugewhile keeping power applied. After about onesecond, the gauge will have a constant reading -this is the stall force. The cable tension is properlyadjusted when the stall force is between 4 and 6pounds. If the force is not in this range, decreaseor increase the cable tension and repeat thisparagraph.

Figure 7-18. Door Drive Hardware

Figure 7-19. Door Drive Cable AdjustmentHardware

Figure 7-20. Measuring Stall Force

7-11764330-117

D. Tighten cable tension lock nut while ensuringthe cable tension nut does not rotate.

2. Extending Adjustment Range

If there is not enough adjustment available in thethreaded cable end fitting to attain the requiredcable stall force, it will be necessary to relocate theidler pulley to increase the available adjustmentthreads.

A. Remove the drive cable from idler pulley.

B. Remove the idler pulley pivot screw, pulley,and spacer washer under the pulley and appro-priately reposition them in one of the alternatetapped holes (see Figure 7-18) in the pulley bracketto attain the cable adjustability needed.

C. Adjust the door drive cable tension nut so thereis moderate cable tension.

D. Repeat the above Tension Adjustment.

7.8.3.6 Door Open Sensor Adjustment

1. Position the door in the fully open position (sus-pension arm against door open hard stop).

2. Secure the sensor to the pulley bracket such thatthe sensing end of the sensor is 1/16" from thecable bracket. See Figure 7-21.

Figure 7-21. Door Open Sensor Adjustment

7.8.3.7 Door Shock Absorber Adjustment

1. Perform the following for the door open andclosed shock absorbers. See Figure 7-22.

Figure 7-22. Shock Absorber Adjustment

A. Adjust the shock absorber dial to “4” andtighten the dial set screw using the allen keysupplied with the shock absorber.

B. Place the allen key in the 3/16" diameter hole atthe top of motor mount plate for storage. SeeFigure 7-23.

Figure 7-23. Shock Absorber Keys Stowage

C. Thread each shock absorber and locknut (keep-ing the locknut away from the suspension arm)into the suspension arm such that when the shockabsorber’s piston is fully retracted (bottomed out),it is flush with the surface of the arm.D. Back out the shock absorber turn so when itspiston is fully retracted, it is recessed into thesuspension arm approx .025".

E. Tighten the lock nut while ensuring the shockabsorber does not rotate.

2. Secure the two allen keys in the motor mountplate hole with a piece of tape. See Figure 7-23.

7-12764330-117

7.8.3.8 Final Door Operation Check

1. Power the door fully in both directions five timesand ensure that:

A. Door operation is smooth and uniform, there isno contact of the moving door to the door hooks,door lock lever, or any other components.

B. Door deceleration at full open and closed isreasonably smooth. If needed, the shock absorb-ers may be re adjusted.

C. The door stall force is within the specifiedrange (See Door Drive Cable Tension Adjustment). Ifit is not within the specified range, set the stallforce as prescribed above and all subsequent stepsof that section.

7.9 SAFETY VALVE TEST ANDREGULATOR VALVE SETTING

Refer to Section 5 Service Mode for procedures.

7.10 VACUUM PUMP TEST

7.10.1 Vacuum Pump Water Flow Rate

A 1.5 gpm flow resistor FR1 is fitted between S7 andthe vacuum pump. To verify proper flow rate, dis-connect the flexible line downstream of FR1 at thevacuum pump. Divert the line to a suitable con-tainer (two gallon bucket). Access the Service Modeand actuate S7. Allow the S7 valve to operate for oneminute. This should be 1.5 gallons of water +/-.25gallons.

7.10.2 Vacuum Pump Performance Test

If there is a question as to the ability of the vacuumpump to pull a sufficient depth of vacuum, firstconfirm water flow rate, water temperature (70°Fmaximum), proper rotation direction, and propervoltage. If within specification, the actual dead-head vacuum level should be measured prior topump replacement.

To measure dead-head vacuum level, install vacuumgauge at the 1/8" plugged port at the bottom of S3Drain Valve. Then using the Service Mode, actuateS7 and the vacuum pump. The gauge reads thedead-head vacuum level the pump can provide.Vacuum level is to be 50-60 mmHg absolute. If thepump can provide this vacuum level, it does notrequire replacement.

7.11 LEAK TEST

1. With the display showing the Main Menu, pressthe LEAK TEST, button.

2. Connect absolute gauge to chamber. Keep ballvalve closed at this time. Close door(s) if neces-sary.

3. Jacket Charge — S9 pulses until the jacket hascharged and stabilized. CHARGING JACKET isdisplayed.

4. Active Seal(s) — S35 (S36) pulses to energize thedoor seal. When the pressure behind the sealactivates the seal pressure switch(es) and after a10 second delay, the cycle advances to the Purgephase.

5. Purge — S1, S2, S3, S4, S7, S9 and S40 turn on.

6. Vacuum Pulse — S2 turns off. S4 remains on untilchamber pressure drops below 4 psig. S9 is inter-mittent while controlling the jacket temperature.A vacuum is pulled on the chamber for 1 minute(and 10 inHg is reached).

7. Pressure Pulse — S3 and S7 turn off. S2 and S9turn on. Chamber charges until the pressurereaches 26 psig. Vacuum pulse repeats.

8. Charge — S3 and S7 turn off. S2 and S9 turn on.Verify that chamber is charging with steam andcharges until 270.1°F is reached.

9. Leak Test Evacuating — S2 turns off. S3 and S7turn on. S4 remains on until chamber pressuredrops below 4 psig. S9 is intermittent while con-trolling the 4 jacket temperature. Vacuum is pulledin chamber for 10 minutes.

NOTE: If a minimum of 20 inHg is not reached in 10minutes, the Leak Test is aborted because of insuffi-cient vacuum. The leak must be fixed and Leak Testrepeated.

After 10 minutes, open the ball valve to the abso-lute gauge. The chamber must be at 60 mmHg ordeeper. If this value is not reached, correct leaksand rerun test.

10. Leak Test Stabilizing — S3 and S7 turn off. Thechamber stabilizes for 2 minutes before startingthe leak test count down.

11. Leak Test — S9 is intermittent while controllingthe jacket temperature. The sterilizer times for10 minutes.

12. Air Break — At the end of 10 minutes, S1 turnsoff. Chamber pressure returns to atmospheric.

7-13764330-117

13. Retract Seal(s) — When 2 inHg is reached in thechamber, S35 (36) turn off. S7 and S37 (38) turnon. After the seal pressure switch(es) opens, thevacuum is pulled for an additional 15 seconds.

14. Complete — S7 turns off. S37 (38) remain ON.S3 turns on. S9 maintains jacket temperature atapproximately 270°F. A summary of the valuesattained during the cycle are be printed. Openthe door(s) and remove the absolute gauge fromthe chamber piping.

Sample Printout — Leak Test Cycle

Verify a similar printout for the entire cycle.

============================ L E A K T E S T ============================CYCLE START AT 6:53:25P

ON 1/29/01

26 X 37.5 X 36SINGLE HINGE DOORVACAMATICNBN 069838

CYCLE COUNT 1OPERATOR STERILIZER VAC 00

V=INHG- TIME T=F P=psigC 6:53:38P 130.4 0.3PC 6:54:39P 249.1 16.6PC 6:56:03P 180.9 18.0VC 6:57:01P 272.3 26.1PC 6:58:33P 183.0 17.9VL 7:02:21P 270.1 28.8PL 7:12:57P 148.6 28.8BL 7:14:58P 138.0 28.7VL 7:24:58P 117.4 28.7VLEAK RATE IS:

0.1 mmHg/min

L 7:24:58P 117.4 28.7VE 7:24:58P 117.4 28.7VZ 7:26:09P 119.1 1.9V

LOAD 012902TOTAL CYCLE = 32:30

PRINTOUT CHECKED BY:

=============================The maximum leak rate allowed is 1.0 mmHg per

minute. If the leak rate is greater, the leak must befixed and the Leak Test repeated.

7.12 PERFORMANCE TEST

The following section shows approximate cycle timesfor a 270°F Prevac cycle.

Prevac CycleSterilize Temp = 270°F

Sterize Time = 4 min

Dry Time = 4 min

Phase Valves EnergizedPressure Times

Active Seal *S7, S9, *S35 (36), S37 (38)0 psig 0:05-0:30

Purge S2, S3, S4, *S7, S9, S35 (36)5-20 psig 0:55-1:05

Vacuum #1 S3, **S4, S7, *S9, S35(36)10 inHg min. 1:00-2:05

Pulse #1 S2, *S7, S9, S35(36)26-28 psig 1:00 max

Vacuum #2 S3, **S4, S7, *S9, S35(36)20inHg min 1:00-2:05

Charge S2, *S7, S9, S35(36)27-33 psig 4:00 max

Sterilize (4) S2, *S7, *S9, S35(36)27-33 psig 4:00-4:05

Fast Exhaust S3, S4, *S7, S9, S3593604 psig 3:00 max

Dry S3, S7, *S9, S35(36)20 inHg min 5:00-5:05

Air Break S1, *S7, *S9, S35(36)2 inHg - 0 psig 1:00 max

Retract Seat S7, S37(38)0 psig 0:18-0:28

Complete *S7, S37(38)0 psig —

* Valves are pulsing during this phase. S7 pulsesanytime the drain line temperature approaches140°F.

** S4 is on until 4 psig.

8-1764330-117

8.1 GENERAL

WARNING–PERSONAL INJURY AND/OREQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD: Repairs and ad-justments to this equipment must be made onlyby fully qualified service personnel. Maintenanceperformed by inexperienced, unqualified personsor installation of unauthorized parts could causepersonal injury or result in costly equipment dam-age.

WARNING–SHOCK HAZARD: Disconnect allutilities to sterilizer before servicing. See Section1 for expanded warning.

WARNING–BURN HAZARD: Allow sterilizerto cool to room temperature before performingany cleaning or maintenance procedures.

This section pictorially lists and describes all thepossible alarm conditions which may occur whenoperating the Amsco® Century® Medium Steam Ster-ilizer 26"x37.5."

If a problem occurs that is not described in thissection, please call STERIS. A trained service techni-cian will promptly place your sterilizer in properworking condition.

NOTE: Never permit unqualified persons to service thesterilizer.

8.1.1 Typical Alarm Screen

When an alarm condition occurs, the alarm tonesounds and the touch screen automatically displaysthe corresponding alarm screen. Typically, eachalarm screen indicates the alarm name, current cham-ber status, current sterilizer activity, and operatorinstructions (see Figure 8-1).

Touch-screen pads, located along bottom of alarmscreen, are used to perform the following functions:

• Pressing SILENCE ALARM turns off the alarmtone.

• Pressing STATUS PRINT generates a printoutof the current temperature and pressure in thesterilizer chamber at the time the touch padwas pressed.

• Pressing PAPER FEED advances the printerpaper up by one line.

• Pressing SERVICE HELP advances display tothe corresponding service information screen.This screen provides the qualified service tech-nician with possible causes and advanced cor-rective actions for that alarm condition.

Important: In the event of an alarm condition, theoperator should always follow the instructions indicatedon the alarm screen.

Section 8: Troubleshooting

STATUS PAPERPRINT FEED

SILENCE SERVICEALARM HELP

CHAMBER: 000.0 F 00 psig

STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY TRY TO COMPLETE CYCLE

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. CHECK STEAM SUPPLY VALVE

→ IF CLOSED, OPEN VALVE3. IF ALARM RECURS, CALL SERVICE

STATUS.. ALARM! 205TOO LONG IN CHARGE

Figure 8-1. Typical Alarm Screen

Screen Reference Number

Sterilizer Response toCondition

Current ChamberStatus

Alarm Name

Operator Instructions

Touch-Screen Pads

8-2764330-117

Alarm Description Screen with Operator Instructions

Occurs if chamberdoes not reach the settemperature within theallotted time.

Screen with Service Instructions

* ALARMPRESSURE IN CHAMBER

F 10:07:23A 61.7C 2.34P

Full Print Format Shown

Figure 8-2. Typical Alarm Printout

8.2.1 Too Long In Charge

→ CHAMBER DID NOT REACH STERILIZETEMPERATURE WITHIN ALLOTTED TIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. STEAM PRESSURE LESS THAN 50 psig

→ CHECK STEAM SUPPLY PIPING2. STEAM REGULATOR MALFUNCTION

→ REPAIR3. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

→ REPAIR S09→ REPAIR S02

4. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION→ RECALIBRATE (CONTACT QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSON)

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 206TOO LONG IN CHARGE

SERVICE ABORT EXITMODE

8.1.2 Typical Alarm Printout

When an alarm occurs the printer automaticallygenerates a printout, typically listing alarm name,time alarm occurred, current chamber status, andany associated sensor temperature. See Figure 8-2.

8.2 IN-CYCLE ALARMS

The following alarm screens appear only during cycleoperation:

* ALARMTOO LONG IN CHARGE

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P






→ IF CLOSED, OPEN VALVE3. IF ALARM RECURS, CALL SERVICE

STATUS.. ALARM! 205TOO LONG IN CHARGE

8-3764330-117

Occurs if chamberdoes not exhaust to4 psig (0.28 bar) withinthe allotted time.

Occurs if chamber doesnot reach the setevacuation level withinthe allotted time.

8.2.2 Too Long In Exhaust

8.2.3 Too Long InEvacuation




STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY TRY TO COMPLETE CYCLE• EXTEND EXHAUST TIME

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. IF ALARM RECURS, CALL SERVICE

STATUS.. ALARM! 200TOO LONG IN EXHAUST




OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. CHECK WATER SUPPLY VALVE

→→→→→ IF CLOSED, OPEN VALVE3. IF ALARM RECURS, ABORT CYCLE

AND CALL SERVICE

STATUS.. ALARM! 202TOO LONG IN EVACUATION

ABORT


→→→→→ CHAMBER DID NOT EXHAUST TOATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE WITHIN ALLOTTEDTIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. CHAMBER DRAIN STRAINER PLUGGED

→→→→→ CLEAN2. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR S033. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION

→→→→→ RECALIBRATE (CONTACT QUALIFIEDSERVICE PERSON)

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 201TOO LONG IN EXHAUST

PAPER SERVICE EXITFEED MODE

* ALARMTOO LONG IN EXHAUST

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

* ALARM

TOO LONG IN EVACUATION

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P



8-4764330-117

Occurs if chamberdoes not air break thevacuum to 2 inHg (0.07Vbar) within the allottedtime.

Too Long In Evacuation(Continued)

NOTE: This alarm hastwo service helpscreens.

8.2.4 Too Long In AirBreak



STATUS.. ALARM! 225TOO LONG IN AIR BREAK


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY TRY TO COMPLETE CYCLE• EXTEND AIR BREAK TIME


Alarm Description Screens with Service Instructions

EXIT STATUS PAPER MOREPRINT FEED HELP

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 203TOO LONG IN EVACUATION

→→→→→ CHAMBER DID NOT REACH REQUIREDVACUUM LEVEL WITHIN ALLOTTED TIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. WATER PRESSURE LESS THAN 30 psig

→→→→→ CHECK WATER SUPPLY PIPING2. CHAMBER DRAIN STRAINER PLUGGED

→→→→→ CLEAN3. CHECK VALVE MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR4. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR5. DOOR SEAL NOT ACTIVATED

→→→→→ CHECK SEAL→→→→→ CHECK SEAL STEAM AND EXHAUST

→→→→→ CHAMBER DID NOT REACH REQUIREDVACUUM LEVEL WITHIN ALLOTTED TIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:6. LEAK IN PLUMBING

→→→→→ REPAIR→→→→→ RUN A LEAK TEST

7. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION→→→→→ RECALIBRATE CONTROL (CONTACT

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSON)

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 204TOO LONG IN EVACUATION


* ALARM

TOO LONG IN AIR BREAKF 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-5764330-117

Occurs if chambertemperature dropsbelow sterilizetemperature.

Too Long In Air Break(Continued)

8.2.5 Under SterilizeTemperature

Alarm Description Screen with Service Instructions

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 226TOO LONG IN AIR BREAK

→→→→→ CHAMBER DID NOT AIR BREAK VACUUMTO 2 inHG WITHIN ALLOTTED TIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. AIR INLET FILTER PLUGGED

→→→→→ REPLACE2. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION






STATUS.. ALARM! 223UNDER STERILIZE TEMPERATURE


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY RESTART STERILIZE TIMER

AND CONTINUE CYCLE AFTER SETTEMP. IS REACHED


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 224UNDER STERILIZE TEMPERATURE

→→→→→ CHAMBER TEMPERATURE DROPPED BELOWSTERILIZE TEMPERATURE BY UNDERTEMPTEMPERATURE VALUE

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. STEAM PRESSURE LESS THAN 50 PSIG

→→→→→ CHECK STEAM SUPPLY PIPING2. CHAMBER STEAM TRAP MALFUNCTION


→→→→→ REPAIR S09→→→→→ REPAIR S02

4. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION→→→→→ RECALIBRATE (CONTACT QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSON)


* UNDERTEMP

F 7:53:51A 247.8 30P

TEMP MIN=265.6F


8-6764330-117

Occurs if chambertemperature exceedsthe maximum sterilizetemperature (Controltemp. + over temp.value).

8.2.6 Over SterilizeTemperature

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 236OVER STERILIZE TEMPERATURE

→→→→→ STERILIZE TEMPERATURE IS ABOVESETPOINT BY MORE THAN PRESCRIBEDAMOUNT

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. STEAM PRESSURE MORE THAN 50 psig

→→→→→ CHECK STEAM SUPPLY PIPING2. CHAMBER STEAM TRAP MALFUNCTION


→→→→→ REPAIR S09→→→→→ REPAIR S02


SERVICE PERSON)

SERVICE STATUS PAPER EXITMODE PRINT FEED


NOTE: The control temperatureis the value the sterilizer main-tains during the sterilize phase.This value is 2°F above the cyclesterilize temperature set point.The over temperature value isadded to the control tempera-ture value to arrive at the tem-perature which causes this cyclealarm.




OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. IF ALARM RECURS, ABORT CYCLE

AND CALL SERVICE

STATUS.. ALARM! 235OVER STERILIZE TEMPERATURE

ABORT

* UNDERTEMP

F 7:53:51A 247.8 30P

TEMP MAX=279.4F

8-7764330-117

Occurs if steam pres-sure in door seal dropsbelow 5 psig (0.34Pbar).

8.2.8 Chamber Pressure/Temperature Failure

Occurs if chamberpressure or temperaturereadings are outside thenormal steam rangeduring sterilize phase.

8.2.7 Door Unsealed



STATUS.. ALARM! 207DOOR UNSEALED


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY ABORT CYCLE• EXHAUST OR AIR BREAK CHAMBER TO

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. CALL SERVICE

→→→→→ STEAM PRESSURE IN DOOR SEAL BELOW5 psig

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. SEAL PRESSURE SWITCH MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ CHECK PS1(PS2) CONNECTIONS→→→→→ READJUST PS1(PS2)→→→→→ REPAIR PS1(PS2)

2. SEAL NOT ACTIVATED→→→→→ CHECK SEAL STEAM→→→→→ CHECK SEAL EXHAUST

3. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR S35(S36)

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 208DOOR UNSEALED

PAPER CLEAR EXITFEED ALARM



STATUS.. ALARM! CHAMBER 219PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE FAILURE


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY ABORT CYCLE



* ALARM

DOOR UNSEALEDF 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

* ALARM

FAILURE READING TEMP/PRS

JACKET - 260.1

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-8764330-117

Chamber Pressure/Temperature Failure(Continued)


8.2.9 No Pump Water Occurs if waterpressure supplied tothe vacuum pump isless than the pressureswitch setting.

STATUS.. SERVICE INFO: CHAMBER 220PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE FAILURE

→→→→→ PRESSURE OR TEMPERATURE OUTSIDENORMAL STEAM RANGE

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION


2. TRANSDUCER, CP, MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR

3. RTD PROBE, RTD1, MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR

4. MAIN CONTROL FAILURE→→→→→ CHECK CONTROL BOARD POWER STATUS

LEDs→→→→→ REPLACE CONTROL BOARD→→→→→ RECALIBRATE







STATUS.. ALARM! 282NO PUMP WATER

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 283NO PUMP WATER

→→→→→ PS3 WATER SUPPLY PRESSURESWITCH NOT CLOSED

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. WATER PRESSURE LESS THAN 30 PSIG

→→→→→ CHECK WATER SUPPLY PIPING2. PS3 PRESSURE SWITCH OPEN

→→→→→ CHECK SWITCH AND WIRING TO SWITCH



8-9764330-117

Occurs if liquid cyclefast exhaust rate is toofast.

8.2.10 Exhaust Rate TooFast

Occurs if liquid cycleslow exhaust rate is tooslow.

8.2.11 Exhaust Rate TooSlow



STATUS.. ALARM! 243EXHAUST RATE TOO SLOW


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY TRY TO COMPLETE CYCLE• TRY TO EXHAUST CHAMBER ACCORDING

TO OPTIMAL COOLING RATE





STATUS.. ALARM! 241EXHAUST RATE TOO FAST


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY TRY TO COMPLETE CYCLE• TRY TO EXHAUST CHAMBER ACCORDING

TO OPTIMAL COOLING RATE


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 242EXHAUST RATE TOO FAST

→→→→→ CHAMBER EXHAUSTED FASTERTHAN THE EXPECTED RATE.

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR S402. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR S033. CHAMBER STEAM TRAP MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR4. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION




8-10764330-117


8.2.12 RecorderDeviation Alarm

Occurs if the two tem-perature sensing ele-ments in the chamberdrain probe read morethan 1°F apart.



STATUS.. ALARM! 281RECORDER DEVIATION


RECORDER: 140.0 F

STERILIZER WILL:• PREVENT NEW CYCLE FROM BEING

STARTED UNTIL ALARM IS CLEARED


Exhaust Rate Too Slow,Continued

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 244EXHAUST RATE TOO SLOW

→→→→→ CHAMBER EXHAUSTED SLOWERTHAN THE EXPECTED RATE.


→→→→→ REPAIR S402. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR S033. CHAMBER STEAM TRAP MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ REPAIR4. CONTROL OUT OF CALIBRATION




8-11764330-117


8.2.13Door PressureFailure

(Hinged Door ModelsOnly)

Occurs if door pressurelock is sensed disen-gaged while in cycle.

→→→→→ STEAM PRESSURE IN DOOR SEAL BELOW0.34 BAR

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. DOOR LOCK SWITCH MALFUNCTION

→→→→→ CHECK LS5(LS6) CONNECTIONS→→→→→ READJUST LS5(LS6)→→→→→ REPAIR LS5(LS6)

2. SEAL NOT ACTIVATED→→→→→ CHECK SEAL STEAM→→→→→ CHECK SEAL EXHAUST

3. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR S35( S36)



STATUS.. ALARM! 284DOOR PRESSURE FAILURE


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY ABORT CYCLE• EXHAUST OR AIR BREAK CHAMBER TOATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 285DOOR PRESSURE FAILURE:


8-12764330-117

8.3 OUT-OF-CYCLE ALARMS

The following alarm screens will appear only when thesterilizer is not processing a cycle.

Occurs if door switchdoes not make contactwithin allotted time.

8.3.1 Too Long To CloseDoor

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 240TOO LONG TO CLOSE DOOR

→→→→→ DOOR SWITCH DID NOT MAKE INALLOTTED TIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. DOOR SWITCH MALFUNCTION


2. POWER DOOR MECHANISM FAILURE→→→→→ REPAIR MECHANISM→→→→→ REPLACE MOTOR




STATUS.. ALARM! 239TOO LONG TO CLOSE DOOR


STERILIZER WILL:• REMAIN IN ALARM CONDITION

UNTIL DOOR IS CLOSED

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. CHECK DOOR FOR OBSTRUCTION

→→→→→ REMOVE OBSTRUCTION ANDCLOSE DOOR

3. IF DOOR WILL NOT CLOSE, CALLSERVICE


* ALARM

TOO LONG TO CLOSE

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

8-13764330-117

8.3.2 Too Long To OpenDoor

Occurs if door switchdoes not open withinthe allotted time.

8.3.3 Pressure InChamber

Occurs if 2 psig(0.14 Pbar) pressure issensed in the chamber.



STATUS.. ALARM! 221PRESSURE IN CHAMBER


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY EXHAUST CHAMBER TO

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 246TOO LONG TO OPEN DOOR


→→→→→ DOOR SWITCH DID NOT OPEN INALLOTTED TIME


→→→→→ CHECK LS1(LS2) CONNECTIONS→→→→→ READJUST LS1(LS2)

2. POWER DOOR MECHANISM FAILURE→→→→→ REPAIR MECHANISM→→→→→ REPLACE MOTOR



STATUS.. ALARM! 245TOO LONG TO OPEN DOOR


STERILIZER WILL:• REMAIN IN ALARM CONDITION

UNTIL DOOR IS OPENED



* ALARM

TOO LONG TO OPENF 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

* ALARM

PRESSURE IN CHAMBER

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-14764330-117

Pressure In Chamber(Continued)



CHAMBER: 000.0 F 00 psigWASTE: 000.0 F

STERILIZER WILL:• PREVENT NEW CYCLE FROM BEING

STARTED UNTIL ALARM IS CLEARED


STATUS.. ALARM! WASTE 215TEMPERATURE PROBE FAILURE


8.3.4 Waste TemperatureProbe Failure

Occurs if waste linetemperature reading isoutside the normalrange.

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 222PRESSURE IN CHAMBER

→→→→→ 2 psig PRESSURE SENSED IN CHAMBERWHEN NOT IN CYCLE




3. TRANSDUCER, CP, MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR→→→→→ RECALIBRATE

4. MAIN CONTROL FAILURE→→→→→ CHECK CONTROL BOARD POWER STATUS

LEDs→→→→→ REPLACE CONTROL BOARD→→→→→ RECALIBRATE


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 216WASTE TEMP PROBE FAILURE

→→→→→ RTD PROBE, RTD2, OUTPUT IS OUTSIDENORMAL RANGE

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. LOOSE CONNECTIONS IN PROBE WIRING

→→→→→ REPAIR2. PROBE FAILED

→→→→→ REPLACE→→→→→ RECALIBRATE


SERVICE PERSON)4. MAIN CONTROL FAILURE

→→→→→ CHECK CONTROL BOARD POWER STATUSLEDs

→→→→→ REPLACE CONTROL BOARD→→→→→ RECALIBRATE


* ALARM

FAILURE READING WASTE TWASTE = 298.8

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-15764330-117

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 264DISPLAY ERROR

→→→→→ FAILURE TO COMMUNICATETO THE DISPLAY

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. LOOSE DISPLAY CABLE CONNECTION

P1A TO DOOR 'A' AND/ORP1B TO DOOR 'B'→→→→→ REPAIR→→→→→ REPLACE CABLE

2. FAULTY DISPLAY BOARD ON DOOR 'A'AND/OR DOOR 'B' SIDE→→→→→ REPLACE

3. FAULTY CONNECTION IN DISPLAY BOX→→→→→ REPLACE

4. FAULTY CONNECTION IN CONTROL BOX→→→→→ REPLACE


8.3.5 Display Error Occurs if the controlcannot communicatewith the display.



STATUS.. ALARM! 263DISPLAY ERROR




8.3.6 AtmosphericPressure Alarm

Occurs if atmosphericpressure is greater than1 psig from the cali-brated atmosphericpressure.




STATUS.. ALARM! 269ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE ALARM

CHAMBER: 000.0 F 00 psigALTITUDE SETTING: 0 TO 1000 FEET



8-16764330-117

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 270ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE ALARM

→→→→→ THE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE ISGREATER THAN 1 PSI FROM THECALIBRATED ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. THE STERILIZER IS AT A HIGHER

ALTITUDE THAN WHERE IT WASORIGINALLY CALIBRATED (FACTORY)→→→→→ SET ALTITUDE


SERVICE PERSON)3. LOOSE CONNECTION IN TRANSDUCER

WIRING→→→→→ REPAIR

4. TRANSDUCER FAILED→→→→→ REPLACE→→→→→ RECALIBRATE


8.3.7 Relay #1 Failure Occurs if the switchedneutral relay associatedwith Door Seal ‘A,’ DoorSeal ‘B’ and the Cham-ber Float Switch fails.



STATUS.. ALARM! 273RELAY #1 FAILURE




Atmospheric PressureAlarm, Continued



8-17764330-117

8.3.8 Relay #2 Failure Occurs if the switchedneutral relay associatedwith Door ‘A’ closedswitch fails.



STATUS.. ALARM! 274RELAY #2 FAILURE




8.3.9 Relay #3 Failure Occurs if the switchedneutral relay associatedwith Door ‘B’ closedswitch fails.


STATUS PAPERSILENCE SERVICE

STATUS.. ALARM! 275



OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM

8.3.10RTC Failure



STATUS.. ALARM! 276RTC FAILURE




Occurs if the real timeclock timer chip on themain control circuitboard fails.



8-18764330-117

8.3.11ROM Failure Occurs if the Read Onlymemory on the maincontrol circuit boardfails.

8.3.12RAM Failure Occurs if the RandomAccess memory on themain control circuitboard fails.


8.3.13ADC Failure Occurs if the Analog toDigital Board on themain control circuitboard fails.



STATUS.. ALARM! 277ROM FAILURE






STATUS.. ALARM! 278RAM FAILURE






STATUS.. ALARM! 279ADC FAILURE






8-19764330-117

8.4 SENSOR ALARMS

The following alarm screens appear anytime the sterilizeris energized. The sensors are continually monitoredwhenever the sterilizer is in or out of cycle.

8.4.1 Water In Chamber Occurs if excess wateris sensed in thechamber.

Occurs if jacket doesnot reach set tempera-ture within allotted time.

8.4.2 Too Long In JacketCharge



STATUS.. ALARM! 231TOO LONG IN JACKET CHARGE

CHAMBER: 000.0 F 00 psigJACKET: 000.0 F

STERILIZER WILL:• REMAIN IN ALARM CONDITION UNTIL

JACKET TEMP. IS REACHED


→→→→→ IF CLOSED, OPEN VALVE3. IF ALARM RECURS, CALL SERVICE




WARNING - BURN HAZARD!CHAMBER MAY BE FILLED WITH STEAMCONDENSATE

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. DO NOT OPEN DOOR2. SILENCE ALARM3. CALL SERVICE IMMEDIATELY

STATUS.. ALARM! 209WATER IN CHAMBER


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 210WATER IN CHAMBER

→→→→→ EXCESS WATER SENSED IN CHAMBER,WARNING! BURN HAZARD

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. JACKET STRAINER PLUGGED

→→→→→ CLEAN2. JACKET TRAP FAILED CLOSED

→→→→→ REPAIR3. CHAMBER TRAP FAILED CLOSED

→→→→→ REPAIR4. WATER ENTERED CHAMBER THROUGH STEAM

PIPING→→→→→ CHECK BOILER OR STEAM GENERATOR→→→→→ REPAIR PIPING

5. WATER FLOAT SENSOR MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR


* ALARM

WATER IN CHAMBERF 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

* ALARM

TOO LONG IN JACKET CHARGE

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-20764330-117

Too Long In Jacket Charge(Continued)

Occurs if door sealdoes not reach5 psig (0.34 Pbar)within allotted time.

8.4.3 Too Long To SealDoor


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 232TOO LONG IN JACKET CHARGE

→→→→→ JACKET DID NOT REACH REQUIREDTEMPERATURE WITHIN ALLOTTED TIME

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. STEAM PRESSURE LESS THAN 50 PSIG

→→→→→ CHECK STEAM SUPPLY PIPING2. STEAM REGULATOR MALFUNCTION







STATUS.. ALARM! 227TOO LONG TO SEAL DOOR



DOOR IS SEALED


→→→→→ IF CLOSED, OPEN VALVE ANDRESELECT CYCLE

3. IF ALARM RECURS, CALL SERVICE

STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 228TOO LONG TO SEAL DOOR

→→→→→ DOOR SEAL DID NOT REACH 5 psigWITHIN ALLOTTED TIME


→→→→→ READJUST PS1(PS2)→→→→→ REPAIR PS1(PS2)

2. SEAL NOT ACTIVATING→→→→→ CHECK SEAL STEAM→→→→→ CHECK SEAL EXHAUST

3. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR S35(S36)


* ALARM

TOO LONG TO SEAL

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-21764330-117

Occurs if door sealpressure does not dropbelow 5 psig (0.35 Pbar)within allotted time.

8.4.4 Too Long To UnsealDoor

Occurs if chamberpressure reading isoutside the normalrange.

8.4.5 Chamber PressureTransducer Failure



STATUS.. ALARM! 229TOO LONG TO UNSEAL DOOR



DOOR IS UNSEALED

OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:1. SILENCE ALARM2. CALL SERVICE3. If load must be removed, refer to

emergency door operation procedurein operating manual.


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 230TOO LONG TO UNSEAL DOOR

→→→→→ DOOR SEAL PRESSURE NOT BELOW 5 psigWITHIN ALLOTTED TIME


→→→→→ READJUST PS1(PS2)→→→→→ REPAIR PS1(PS2)

2. SEAL NOT RETRACTING→→→→→ CHECK SEAL STEAM→→→→→ CHECK SEAL EXHAUST

3. SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION→→→→→ REPAIR S37(S38)→→→→→ REPAIR S35(S36)


STATUS PAPERSILENCE SERVICEALARM PRINT FEED HELP

STATUS.. ALARM! CHAMBER217




* ALARM

TOO LONG TO UNSEAL

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

* ALARM

FAILURE READINGPRESSURE

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-22764330-117

Chamber PressureTransducer Failure(Continued)

Occurs if chambertemperature reading isoutside the normalrange.

8.4.6 ChamberTemperature ProbeFailure



STATUS.. ALARM! CHAMBER 211TEMPERATURE PROBE FAILURE





STATUS.. SERVICE INFO: CHAMBER 218PRESSURE TRANSDUCER FAILURE

→→→→→ TRANSDUCER, CP, OUTPUT VOLTAGE ISOUTSIDE NORMAL RANGE

CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. LOOSE CONNECTION IN TRANSDUCER

WIRING→→→→→ REPAIR

2. TRANSDUCER FAILED→→→→→ REPAIR→→→→→ RECALIBRATE






STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 212CHAMBER TEMP PROBE FAILURE


CAUSES AND CORRECTION:1. LOOSE CONNECTION IN PROBE WIRING








* ALARM

FAILURE READING CHAMBER T

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-23764330-117

8.4.7 Jacket TemperatureProbe Failure

Occurs if jacket tem-perature reading isoutside the normalrange.

Occurs if door sealswitch contact is madebut door switch is stillopen.

8.4.8 Door Switch Failure



CHAMBER: 000.0 F 00 psigJACKET: 000.0 F



STATUS.. ALARM! JACKET 213TEMPERATURE PROBE FAILURE



STATUS.. ALARM! 237DOOR SWITCH FAILURE


STERILIZER WILL:• AUTOMATICALLY ABORT CYCLE• EXHAUST CHAMBER TO ATMOSPHERIC

PRESSURE



STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 214JACKET TEMP PROBE FAILURE










* ALARMFAILURE READING JACKET T

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P

* ALARM

DOOR SWITCH FAILURE

F 10:34:54P 222.9 3P


8-24764330-117

Occurs if the chamberrecorder temperatureis outside the normalrange.

8.4.9 Recorder TemperatureProbe Failure

Door Switch Failure(Continued)


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 238DOOR SWITCH FAILURE

→→→→→ DOOR SWITCH OPEN WHILE SEAL SWITCHCLOSED



2. SEAL PRESSURE SWITCH MALFUNCTION→→→→→ READJUST PS1(PS2)→→→→→ REPAIR PS1(PS2)





STATUS.. ALARM! RECORDER 271TEMPERATURE PROBE FAILURE


RECORDER: 140.0 F


STATUS.. SERVICE INFORMATION: 272RECORDER TEMP PROBE FAILURE










8-25764330-117

8.4.10 Board OvertempFailure

Occurs if the tempera-ture of the main controlcircuit board exceedsacceptable environmen-tal conditions.




STATUS.. ALARM! 280BOARD OVERTEMP FAILURE




9-1764330-117

Section 9: Component Replacement and Repair

9.1 AIR FILTER

The purpose of the bacterial air filter is to filter incom-ing air. The system is exposed to contamination when-ever the filter or air lines are opened. Keep thesecomponents as clean as possible when servicing.Never operate the sterilizer without the air filter.Replace the filter as follows:

1. Allow chamber to be at 0 psig.

2. Locate filter on the air inlet piping. Remove filter byunthreading from the piping.

3. Apply tape sealant to air inlet piping and installnew filter. Hand tighten only.

9.2 SOLENOID VALVES

Solenoid valves can generally be rebuilt many times.Replacement of the entire valve is necessary whenthe seat of the valve has been eroded. Erosion maycause leak. To rebuild a solenoid, valve follow theinstructions included in the repair kit.

9.3 CHECK VALVES

Check valve CK4 (Constant Bleed Check Valve) can berebuilt using P-764329-776. Follow the instructionssupplied with the repair kit. The remaining checkvalves can only be cleaned or replaced. When a valvebecomes defective, the entire valve must be replaced.

9.4 STEAM TRAPS

Three steam traps are used: steam supply piping,chamber drain, and jacket drain.

The steam supply trap is a thermodynamic trap andcan be placed back into service after cleaning. Re-placement is necessary only if the seat or disc isdamaged.

The chamber and jacket traps are thermostatic bel-lows which can be rebuilt in the following manner:

1. Allow steam pressure to drop to 0 psig.

2. Allow trap to cool to room temperature beforedisassembly.

3. Using a suitable wrench, unscrew and remove thecap and diaphragm.

4. Remove the diaphragm from the cap.

5. Using a suitable tool, remove the seat from the bodyof the trap.

6. Clean body and cap of any foreign material.

7. Install new seat in trap body.

8. Install new diaphragm in cap.

9. Install cap/diaphragm onto body using newgasket.

10. Turn steam on and check for leaks.

9.5 STEAM PRESSURE REGULATINGVALVE

! CAUTION: Handle sylphon and bellows as-sembly gently to avoid damage.

9.5.1 Disassembly

! WARNING – Turn off steam and vent jacketto 0 psig prior to performing this procedure.

See Figure 9-1 for valve assembly.

1. Remove pilot line fitting at top of valve. Turnadjusting screw (#18) counter clockwise untilspring is completely free of compression. Removescrew (#12) and turn entire top assembly to alignlugs on bonnet and sylphon assembly (#19) withnotches on bottom plate. Lift off top assembly.

2. Remove four screws (#3) fastening cover to bot-tom plate (#13), lower spring plate (#8), spring(#7) and upper spring plate (#6).

3. Remove two screws (#2), reinforcement (#4) andbellows assembly (#5).

4. Remove cotter pin (#11). Pull out fork pivot pin(#10) and remove fork (#9).

5. Unscrew and remove sylphon and bonnet assem-bly from valve body. Also, unscrew and removevalve seat (#21).

6. Pull stem and disc assembly (#20) from sylphon.Carefully clean valve components. Carefully ex-amine the bellows assembly and the sylphon andbonnet assembly for cracks. Check valve seat andvalve stem assembly for etching, scratches or otherevidence of damage or leakage. Replace if wornor marred. Examine all parts for wear or damage.Replace as necessary.

9-2764330-117

9.5.2 Reassembly

1. Screw valve seat (#21) into body, hex side down.

2. Replace stem and disc (#20) in sylphon (#19) andscrew bonnet onto body.

3. Position fork on bottom plate. Insert pivot pinand cotter pins.

4. Screw reinforcement (#4) onto bellows and fastento cover with two screws (#2).

5. Set lower spring plate, spring, and top springplate in place. Make sure the lugs on the springset are properly positioned in the fork bearings.

Figure 9-1. Steam Control Valve

6. Replace cover and bellows, and secure cover withfour screw (#3).

7. Lower this entire assembly into position over thesylphon, aligning the notches in the bottom platewith the lugs on the bonnet to allow the bottomplate to seat on the bonnet. Replace screw (#2).

8. Turn adjusting screw (#18) fully counterclock-wise to remove all the tension from the spring.Turn the stem protruding from the bellows toestablish a clearance of 1/16" between seat anddisc (Figure 9-2). If valve was not removed fromsterilizer, open side connection to see disc andseat.

9-3764330-117

9.8 HEAT EXCHANGER

The heat exchanger can be removed by loosening fourunion fittings. Once removed from the sterilizer, theremaining plumbing can be removed from the heatexchanger and transferred to the replacement heatexchanger. Note that de-soldering/re-soldering ofone plumbing line will be necessary.

9.9 VACUUM PUMP

Removal of the vacuum pump will involve the follow-ing steps:

1. Disconnect single phase and three phase voltageand follow lockout tag-out procedures.

2. Remove safety valve outlet piping.

3. Remove heat exchanger.

4. Remove S4 plumbing line.

5. Remove S43 plumbing line.

6. Remove electrical connection.

7. Remove vacuum pump.

8. Reinstallation is in reverse order. Note after instal-lation verification of pump rotation will be neces-sary. If rotation is in wrong direction reverse one ofthe legs of the three phase power at the pump.

9.10 CPU BOARD

! CAUTION: Whenever handling electronic com-ponents, use of a grounding wrist strap ismandatory to prevent static discharge dam-age.

NOTE: Some plug connectors fit very tight. It may benecessary to use a small flat blade screwdriver toassist in prying the connectors apart. As long as poweris off, the screwdriver blade cannot cause electronicdamage by shoring across the connector pins.

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED: P-764326-559 PLCchip remover.

Refer to Figure 9-3 for location of the main controlassembly.

Remove or service the main CPU board.

1. Open front service access door.

2. Turn main power switch OFF (refer to Figure 9-3).

3. Open control box cover.

4. Locate CPU board (in slot farthest to the right)and remove board.

9. Turn steam on and adjust steam control valves.In service mode, select Input/output Tests, closedoor and actuate S25. Turn adjusting screw (#18)until jacket pressure, as indicated on the jacketpressure gauge, is 40 psig +/-1. Lock in place.

9.6 SAFETY VALVE

Replacement of the safety valve is a basicallystraightforward process, however, there are twopoints to consider: As with all pipe fittings, the pipesealer used must not be excessively applied, other-wise the valve mechanism may malfunction. Also,the outlet piping from the safety valve, if other thanfactory supplied, must not be reduced in pipe size.A reduction in pipe size would cause a restrictionin flow and be in violation of A.S.M.E. codes.

9.7 STRAINERS

Plumbing strainers (steam, water, and jacket) shouldbe cleaned periodically per the maintenance sched-ule. Prior to removing the strainer screen, the pip-ing must be at 0 psig (water line for water strainer,steam supply line for steam strainer, and jacket forthe jacket strainer).

Remove the screen and wash with soap and water.Inspect the screen for damage. Replace the screenwith a new screen if debris cannot be removed or ifthe screen is damaged.

Figure 9-2. Adjusting HI-LO Valve

9-4764330-117

5. Install new board.

6. Perform calibration of pressure and temperatureafter CPU board replacement. Do not load calibra-tion values from old CPU board.

NOTE: Replacement CPU boards are unprogrammed asshipped from STERIS. When replacing this board, en-sure the original program chips are transferred from theexisting board; otherwise new program chips must beinstalled.

9.11 FLASH MEMORY CHIPS — U13,U16, U15 AND U12

Remove and replace Flash Memory chips on CPUboard (refer to Figure 9-4).

Tools necessary – Wrist strap and a chip puller de-vice. A PLC puller is available from STERIS using partnumber P-764326-559.

Procedure – The procedure involves entering the Ser-vice Mode and downloading the existing calibrationdata, installing the new flash chips and reloading theold calibration data.

The procedure for chip replacement is as follows:

1. Power up sterilizer control. Enter the service mode.The access code is the current year (e.g., 2002).

Figure 9-3. CPU Board

2. Press the “Calibration” selection button. Then se-lect “Temp/Press Verification”. Then select “Cal.Data Print”. The printer prints the temperature andpressure calibration data currently in memory us-ing the terms “Low Value”, “Low Raw Data”, etc.Save the printout for a later step.

3. Power down the sterilizer and, using a wriststrap, remove the CPU board. Look closely atthe four flash chips on the board, U13, U16, U15,and U12.

NOTE: On the edge of each chip there is a dot. This dotindicates the correct orientation of the chip in thesocket. When the chip is removed, you will see thesocket has an arrow which indicates the direction thedot on the chip is to be oriented.

NOTE: The chips on the original board may not belabeled in the same way as the replacement chips,therefore you will have to look at the board to see whichis U13, U16, U15, and U12.

4. Using the chip puller, remove the existing chipsand replace with the new chips, paying closeattention to the correct positioning of the dot onthe chip.

5. Reinstall the board in the sterilizer and powerup the unit. The control automatically burns-inthe program.

6. Enter the service mode and enter the calibrationsection. Enter “Calibrate Temperature” and se-lect “Load Values.” Enter the data that wasprinted out earlier. Repeat with “Calibrate Pres-sure” in the same manner.

7. Finally, it is necessary to configure the control tomatch the sterilizer. Select “alarm/Maintenance”on the Service Mode main menu. Then select “Con-figure Machine.” Then select “Set Configuration.”

! CAUTION: Do not select “Load Program.”This is used only when downloading a newprogram using a PC. If “Load Program” isinadvertently selected, it is necessary to powerOFF/ON to clear the control.

Once in “Set Configuration,” select the configura-tion of the sterilizer.

8. Return to main menu and run a test cycle. Thesterilizer can then be place back into service.

9-5764330-117

9.12 BATTERY

Remove the battery on CPU board.

1. Remove CPU board (refer to procedure describedearlier).

2. Refer to Figure 9-3, and locate battery. Removeusing a small blade screwdriver.

3. Install new battery. Use caution as the batterypins are easily bent.

4. Reinstall CPU board.

Figure 9-4. Control Components

9.13 I/O BOARD

Refer to Figure 9-4 for location. Remove I/O board asfollows.


2. Turn main power switch OFF.


4. I/O board #1 is in the slot farthest to the left,I/O board #2 is in the SECOND slot from the left.Locate the appropriate I/O board and remove.

5. Install new board.

9-6764330-117

Figure 9-5. Display Housing Figure 9-6. Main Control Box (Rear View)

9.14 POWER SUPPLY

Refer to Figure 9-4 for location. Remove the powersupply.


2. Turn power switch OFF.


4. Disconnect connectors at J2, J3, and J4 at bottomof power supply.

5. Remove four nuts using a 1/4" nut driver. Usecaution as dropping one of the nuts may cause itto become lodged in the connector board, re-quiring removal of the entire main control box.

6. Remove power supply/housing.

7. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screwsand remove the power supply from the housing.

NOTE: The power supply has two fuses, F1 and F2.These are not considered service replacement com-ponents. A failure of either fuse indicates a cata-strophic internal failure in the power supply.

9.15 MAIN CONTROL BOX

Remove the main control box as follows.

1. Turn power switch OFF (see Figure 9-4).

2. Turn OFF 110 VAC electric service to unit.

IMPORTANT: Lock out and tag out the electric servicedisconnect switch.


4. Disconnect customer 110 VAC power located atupper left hand corner of box.

5. Disconnect ventilation hose located at bottom ofcontrol box.

6. Disconnect ALL wiring harness plugs from theback of the control box. Refer to Figure 9-5.

7. Unbolt nuts and bolts that connect the control boxto the sterilizer frame and remove control box.

9.16 CONNECTOR BOARD

Remove main control box connector board as follows.

1. Remove the main control box (refer to proce-dure described above).

2. Remove the power supply (refer to proceduredescribed above).

3. Remove the CPU board (refer to procedure de-scribed above).

4. Remove the I/O board(s) (refer to proceduredescribed above).

5. Remove the upper circuit board bracket (refer toFigure 9-6).

6. Remove the connectors at the back of thecontrol.

7. Slide connector board out slightly and discon-nect P13 and P14 at back of board, and removeboard.

NOTE: When reinstalling the upper circuit boardbracket, do not tighten the screws until both boards areslipped in place. The brackets have a slot and have tobe adjusted with boards in place.

9-7764330-117

9.17 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

Remove printer assembly as follows.


2. Turn power switch OFF (Figure9-4).

3. Disconnect J10 and J1 from back of display con-trol assembly.

4. Refer to Figure 9-5 and open the display door.

5. Remove paper take up spool and feed paper roll.

6. Remove printer ribbon cartridge.

7. Remove 3/64" socket head screws and swingout display access door.

8. Remove plug from back of printer.

9. On the printer remove top right-hand screw.

Figure 9-7. Display Housing

10. On the printer, loosen the two bottom screws (itis not necessary to remove them), and removethe printer.

9.18 PRINTER BOARD ASSEMBLY

Remove printer board assembly as follows.1. Open front service access door.2. Turn power switch (Figure 9-4) OFF.3. Disconnect J10 and J1 from back of display con-

trol assembly.4. Remove 3/64" socket head screws and swing

out display access door.5. Disconnect J42 and J44 (Figure 9-7).6. Remove four 1/4" nuts and remove board.7. When installing replacement board, note the set-

tings for dip SW1 and jumpers W1 and W2.Refer to the reference section of this manual forsettings.

10-1764330-117

Section 10: Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Significant assemblies and components of theAmsco®Century® Medium Steam Sterilizers 26" x 37.5"are illustrated and identified in this section. The partnumber, the description, and the quantity required foreach usage are given. Each indentation in the descrip-tion represents the assembly level. The UNITS PERASSEMBLY column is specific for the given assemblyor subassembly level.

10.1 HOW TO USE THE ILLUSTRATEDPARTS BREAKDOWN

1. Determine the function and application of thepart required. Select the most appropriate titlefrom the List of Illustrations in the Table of Con-tents. Note the illustration page number.

2. Turn to the page indicated and locate the desiredpart on the illustration.

3. From the illustration, obtain the item numberassigned to the desired part. Refer to the accom-panying tabular list (usually on the facing page)for the part number and description of the part.

10.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCEPACKS

Repair parts needed to perform preventive mainte-nance of equipment components are grouped to-gether in Preventive Maintenance (PM) packs. PMpacks allow the customer to order all necessaryrepair kits using one part number.

PM packs available for Hausted Horison Series in-clude:

10-3764330-117

SchematicDesignation Description Part NumberCS1 SWITCH, Level, Chamber Flooded 93927-069CK1 CHECK VALVE, Filtered Air 150828-444CK2 CHECK VALVE, Anti-cavitation 83521-001CK3 CHECK VALVE, Jacket Steam Trap 10278-091CK4 CHECK VALVE, Constant Steam Bleed 150829-501

• KIT, Repair 764079-776CK5 CHECK VALVE, Water Supply 83870-001CK8 CHECK VALVE, Chamber Drain 150828-446DL1 LOCK, Door (OE, Hinged Door Only) 93911-202DL2 LOCK, Door (NOE, Hinged Door Only) 93911-202DS1 SEAL, Door (OE) 129373-376DS2 SEAL, Door (NOE) 129373-376F1 FILTER, Chamber Air 101006-172F2 DIFFUSER, Steam 129373-528FC1 CONTROL, Water Flow, Vacuum Pump 764328-968FC2 VALVE, Needle, 1/8" PTF 83630-001HX1 HEAT EXCHANGER 136816-022MV1 VALVE, Manual, Water Supply 93918-066MV2 VALVE, Manual, Steam Supply 93921-265MV3 VALVE, Manual, Emergency Exhaust,

Chamber 93918-212MV4 VALVE, Manual, Emergency Exhaust,

Door Seal 93918-212PG1 GAUGE, Chamber Pressure 7872-051PG2 GAUGE, Jacket Pressure 7871-051PR1 REGULATOR, Steam Pressure 136816-215

• KIT, Repair 754359-003PS1 SWITCH, Pressure, Door Seal (OE) 129376-156PS2 SWITCH, Pressure, Door Seal (NOE) 129376-156PS3 SWITCH, Pressure, Vacuum Pump 129376-156PT1 TRANSDUCER, Chamber Pressure 136816-078RTD1 RTD, Chamber Pressure 93922-107RTD2 RTD, Waste Water Temperature 93911-351RTD3 RTD, Jacket Temperature 93911-351RTD4 RTD, Recorder Temperature 93922-107RV1 SAFETY VALVE, Jacket 93921-266S1 (NO) SOLENOID VALVE, Filtered Air 93911-329

• KIT, Repair 764324-895• COIL 764323-741

S2 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Steam to Chamber 93911-331• KIT, Repair 764317-688• COIL 764323-941

S3 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Fast Exhaust 93911-327• KIT, Repair 764071-001• COIL 764324-600

S4 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Exhaust Cooling 93911-328• KIT, Repair 764072-001• COIL 764323-940

S7 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Vacuum Water 93910-479• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

S9 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Steam-to-Jacket 93911-331• KIT, Repair 764317-688• COIL 764323-941

S35 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Steam-to-Seal (OE) 93910-479• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

S36 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Steam-to-Seal (NOE) 93910-479• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

S37 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Seal Retraction (OE) 93910-479• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

SchematicDesignation Description Part NumberS38 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Seal Retraction (NOE) 93910-479

• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

S40 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Chamber Constant Bleed 93910-478• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

S43 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Vacuum Pump Drain 93910-479• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

S46 (NC) SOLENOID VALVE, Waste Cooling Water 93910-479• KIT, Repair 764076-001• COIL 764323-942

SB1 BAFFLE, Chamber Steam (Single Door) 146660-550SB1 BAFFLE, Chamber Steam (Double Door) 146660-497ST1 STRAINER, Water 47708-091ST2 STRAINER, Steam 93921-290ST3 STRAINER, Jacket 150828-459ST4 STRAINER, Chamber Drain 48733-042TR1 STEAM TRAP, Chamber Drain 129222-001

• KIT, Repair 764080-001TR2 STEAM TRAP, Jacket 129222-001

• KIT, Repair 764080-001TR3 STEAM TRAP, Steam Supply 41067-091VP1 VACUUM PUMP 136816-034

CONTROL DISPLAY• MODULE, Display 136809-735• PC BOARD, Interface 146657-752• PC Board, Printer 146656-182• SCREEN, Touch 136809-701• MOTOR, Take Up 93918-014• SPOOL, Take Up 93918-058• PRINTER 93918-051• RIBBON, Printer (Pkg of 2) 150828-440• PAPER (Box of 3) 129362-819• SPEAKER 92918-022• POWER SUPPLY 356256-782CONTROL BOX• PC BOARD, CPU* 141215-202• PC BOARD, Input/Output #1 146659-008• PC BOARD, Input/Output #2 146659-002• POWER SUPPLY 136810-006• SWITCH, Rocker 93911-576• FUSE, 5A (Box of 5) 764317-463RELAY, Solid-State, Motor Starter 93921-377CURRENT BREAKER, Motor Starter 93927-040DOOR DRIVE (Sliding Door Units Only)• MOTOR 146660-338• CABLE 93921-244• SWITCH, Proximity 93909-954

Replacement Parts Listing

10-4764330-117

Figure 10-1. Panel and Control Assembly – Hinged Door

33

20

26 24

4

31

32

12

11

24 244

3

12

28

10

21

2528

24

28 13

10 24

24

25 1

10

242810

8

24

20

28

2533

25

14

26

22

27

1224

24

15

24

18

17

9

7

24

29

17

1627

View At “A”

A

2

10-5764330-117

SVC

DESCRIPTIONFIG. &ITEMNO.

PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-1- PANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–RIGHT HAND, OPERATING END, HINGED DOOR ................................. XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–LEFT HAND, OPERATING END, HINGED DOOR ................................. XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–RIGHT HAND, NON-OPERATING, ENDHINGED DOOR ........................ XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–LEFT HAND, NON-OPERATING, ENDHINGED DOOR ........................ X

1 DISPLAY, Operating End (See Figure 10-23) ..................... 1 1 – –2 DISPLAY, Non-Operating End (See Figure 10-23) ............. – – 1 13 P 146660 542 UPRIGHT, Left Hand, Left Hinge ......................................... – 1 – 14 P 146660 542 UPRIGHT, Right Hand, Left Hinge ...................................... – 1 – 15 P 146660 542 UPRIGHT, Right Hand, Right Hinge .................................... 1 – 1 –6 P 146660 542 UPRIGHT, Left Hand, Right Hinge ...................................... 1 – 1 –7 BOX, Control (See Figure 10-4) .......................................... 1 1 – –8 P 146660 553 BRACKET, Control Box ....................................................... 1 1 – –9 P 146660 563 BOX, Power Input (See Figure 10-21) ................................. 1 1 – –

10 P 93921 288 BRACKET, Upright Support ................................................. 4 4 4 411 P 146660 502 BRACKET, Top Panel Support ............................................ 1 1 1 112 P 93921 273 BRACKET, Strike ................................................................. 3 3 3 313 P 93921 321 BRACKET, Strike ................................................................. – 1 – 114 P 146660 506 WELDMENT, Lower Access Panel ...................................... 1 1 1 115 P 146660 507 BRACKET, Lower Panel Hinge Support .............................. 1 1 1 116 P 93921 272 HINGE, Lower Access Panel ............................................... 1 1 1 117 P 91043 091 HOOK................................................................................... 4 4 4 418 P 83549 001 SASH ................................................................................... 2 2 2 219 P 146660 190 RACK, Literature .................................................................. 1 1 – –20 HOUSING, Display .............................................................. 1 1 1 121 P 93927 527 BRACKET, Display Housing Strike ...................................... 2 2 2 222 P 93927 023 BRACKET, Upright Support ................................................. 2 2 2 223 P 93921 283 BRACKET, Hook .................................................................. 1 1 1 124 P 93912 243 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 1/2" Long .......................... 34 34 23 2325 P 129360 011 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 5/8" Long .......................... 12 12 12 1226 P 129361 221 SCREW, Button Head Cap, #10-32 x 1/2" Long ................. 13 13 13 1327 P 129360 016 NUT, Flange Lock, #10-32 ................................................... 10 10 10 1028 P 93912 225 SCREW, Flange Lock, #10-32 x 3/8" Long ......................... 12 12 12 1229 P 129360 015 NUT, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 .................................................... 4 4 – –30 P 93921 323 BRACKET, Strike ................................................................. 1 – 1 –31 P 84298 001 CATCH, Magnetic ................................................................ 4 4 4 432 P 84121 004 NUT, Keps, Hex, #6-32 ........................................................ 6 6 6 633 P 93927 076 HINGE, Display Housing ...................................................... 1 1 1 1

10-6764330-117

Figure 10-2. Panel and Control Assembly – Sliding Door

View of Gauge TubingView of Gauge Tubing

View of Gauge Tubing

To Chamber Gauge

To Jacket Gauge

To N.O.E.Chamber Gauge

To N.O.E. Jacket Gauge

To O.E.Jacket Gauge

To O.E.Chamber Gauge

59

60

65

3341

64

58

163

41 10

41

417

43

8

29

4147

9

12

4121

4

16

56

4320

42

13

41

43

21 20 38

30

43

42

25

43

4328

43

44

44

24

43

4111

41

64

41

41

43

31

43

10-7764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-2- PANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–RIGHT HAND, OPERATING END .................................................................... XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–LEFT HAND, OPERATING END .................................................................... XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–RIGHT HAND, NON-OPERATING END ........................................................... XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–LEFT HAND, NON-OPERATING END ........................................................... X

1 P 141214 475 DISPLAY, Operating End............................................................. 1 1 – –2 P 141214 476 DISPLAY, Non-Operating End ..................................................... – – 1 13 P 146660 599 UPRIGHT, Left Hand ................................................................... – 1 – 14 P 146660 600 UPRIGHT, Display Side ............................................................... – 1 – 15 P 146660 758 UPRIGHT, Right Hand ................................................................. 1 – 1 –6 P 146660 759 UPRIGHT, Display Side ............................................................... 1 – 1 –7 BOX, Control ................................................................................ 1 1 – –8 P 146660 553 BRACKET, Control Box ............................................................... 1 1 – –9 P 146660 563 BOX, Power Input ........................................................................ 1 1 – –

10 P 93927 048 BRACKET, Upright Support, Top................................................. 1 1 1 111 P 93927 049 BRACKET, Upright Support, Bottom ........................................... 1 1 1 112 P 136816 072 BRACKET, Display, Upright Mounting ......................................... 1 1 1 113 P 13816 073 BRACKET, Display, Upright Mounting ......................................... 1 1 1 114 P 146665 757 WELDMENT, Top Panel .............................................................. – 1 – 115 P 146665 761 PANEL, Kick ................................................................................ 1 1 1 116 P 93927 026 GASKET....................................................................................... 2 2 2 217 P 146665 752 COVER, Door ............................................................................... 1 1 1 118 P 146660 190 RACK, Literature .......................................................................... 1 1 – –19 P 146660 751 HOUSING, Display ...................................................................... 1 1 1 120 P 93927 198 BRACKET, Display Housing Mounting ........................................ 2 2 2 221 P 93927 050 BRACKET, Display Housing Support .......................................... 2 2 2 222 P 146665 753 PANEL, Bottom ............................................................................ – 1 – 123 P 146665 756 PANEL, Bottom ............................................................................ 1 – 1 –24 P 93927 199 BRACKET, Bottom, Panel Mounting, Left .................................... 1 1 1 125 P 93927 200 BRACKET, Bottom, Panel Mounting, Right ................................. 1 1 1 126 P 146665 754 PANEL, Side ................................................................................ – 1 – 127 P 146665 755 PANEL, Side ................................................................................ 1 – 1 –28 P 93927 057 BRACKET, Side, Panel Mounting ................................................ 1 1 1 129 P 93927 058 BRACKET, Side, Panel Mounting ................................................ 1 1 1 130 P 93927 059 BRACKET, Bottom, Side Panel Mounting ................................... 1 1 1 131 P 93927 060 BRACKET, Bottom, Side Panel Mounting ................................... – 1 – 132 P 93927 061 BRACKET, Bottom, Side Panel Mounting ................................... 1 – 1 –33 P 146660 598 BRACKET, Top, Panel Support ................................................... 1 1 1 134 P 93927 046 BRACKET, Strike, Top Panel ...................................................... 2 2 2 235 P 93927 047 BRACKET, Strike, Bottom Panel ................................................. 2 2 2 236 P 136816 074 BRACKET, Kick Panel ................................................................. 2 2 2 237 P 136816 075 BRACKET, Kick Panel End .......................................................... 1 1 1 138 P 146665 762 PANEL, Side Filler ....................................................................... – 1 – 139 P 146665 763 PANEL, Side Filler ....................................................................... 1 – 1 –40 P 84298 001 CATCH, Magnetic ........................................................................ 8 8 8 841 P 93912 243 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 1/2" Long .................................. 34 34 16 1642 P 129360 011 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 5/8" Long .................................. 8 8 8 843 P 93912 225 SCREW, Flange Lock, #10-32 x 3/8" Long ................................. 38 38 8 3844 P 129352 069 NUT, Tinnerman, #10-32 ............................................................. 2 2 2 245 P 129362 821 SCREW, Socket, Button Head, #10-32 x 3/8" Long .................... 8 8 8 846 P 129360 016 NUT, Flange Lock, #10-32 ........................................................... 9 9 9 947 P 129360 015 NUT, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 ............................................................ 4 4 – –


10-8764330-117

Figure 10-2. Panel and Control Assembly – Sliding Door (continued)

Connect red wire to top terminalon emergency stop switch

Emergency stopswitch cable fromcontrol box

Connect black wire to bottom terminalon emergency stop switch

View of Gauge

View of Switch Wiring

55

5854

57

56

53

55

63

56

40

40

4834

4351

26

27

3543

37

43

46

42

40

46

18

36

22

42

46

36

48

43

35

15

40

17

53

1 2 50

19

46

40

43

34

14

49

10-9764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-2- PANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–RIGHT HAND, OPERATING END .................................................................... XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–LEFT HAND, OPERATING END .................................................................... XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–RIGHT HAND, NON-OPERATING END ........................................................... XPANEL & CONTROL ASSEMBLY–LEFT HAND, NON-OPERATING END ........................................................... X

48 P 90562 061 SCREW, Self-Tapping, #8B x 5/8" Long ..................................... 3 3 3 349 P 90198 045 NUT, Speed, “U” Type, #8A ......................................................... 3 3 3 350 P 84121 004 NUT, Keps, Hex, #6-32 ................................................................ 6 6 6 651 P 93927 062 PLUNGER, Lever Type ................................................................ 1 1 1 152 P 146665 765 WELDMENT, Top Panel .............................................................. 1 – 1 –53 P 93917 070 SWITCH, Keyed Pushbutton ....................................................... 1 1 1 154 P 1622 091 ELBOW, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 3/8" NPT .................................... 2 2 2 255 P 136816 096 GAUGE, Chamber ....................................................................... 1 1 1 156 P 126816 097 GAUGE, Jacket ............................................................................ 1 1 1 157 P 849 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 3/8" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................................. 2 2 2 258 P 129373 679 CONNECTOR, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/8" NPT ................. 3 3 2 259 R 003500 767 TUBING, Teflon, 9' Long .............................................................. – 1 1 –60 R 003500 767 TUBING, Teflon, 7' Long .............................................................. – 1 1 –61 R 003500 767 TUBING, Teflon, 12' Long ............................................................ 1 – – 162 R 003500 767 TUBING, Teflon, 10' Long ............................................................ 1 – – 163 P 150473 163 SCREW, Machine, Truss Head, #10-32 x 1/2" Long ................... 2 2 2 264 P 129373 680 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/8" NPT ........................... 1 1 2 265 P 84104 001 WIRE, Tie ..................................................................................... A/R A/R A/R A/R66 P 129326 001 MOUNT, Harness ......................................................................... A/R A/R A/R A/R

10-10764330-117

Figure 10-3. Pulley Assembly – Sliding Door

View From Sheave End

View From Top of Sliding Door

View From Pulley End

181

3

11 511

716 8

15

19

132

11

6

919

5

15

15 15

141

5

12

7

8

11

416

3

10

11

176

213

9

5

12

10-11764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-3- PULLEY ASSENBLY, SINGLE SLIDING DOOR ........................ XPULLEY ASSENBLY, DOUBLE SLIDING DOOR ...................... X

1 P 146660 338 ASSEMBLY, Motor Housing ........................................................ 1 22 P 93911 952 PULLEY ....................................................................................... 1 23 P 93918 355 SHEAVE....................................................................................... 1 24 P 93909 954 ASSEMBLY, Sensor .................................................................... 2 45 P 93927 075 FOLLOWER, Cam ....................................................................... 2 46 P 93927 098 BRACKET, Pulley ........................................................................ 1 27 P 93927 099 PLATE, Motor Mounting ............................................................... 1 28 P 93927 100 BRACKET, Sensor Door Open .................................................... 1 29 P 93927 526 BAR, Door Cable ......................................................................... 1 2

10 P 24911 091 SCREW, Set Hex Socket Head, 5/16x18 x 5/8" Long ................. 1 211 P 93912 243 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 1/2" Long .................................. 2 412 P 13616 101 ARM, Door Suspension ............................................................... 2 413 P 129353 809 BOLT, Shoulder, 1/4 Dia x 1/2" Long .......................................... 1 214 P 150828 313 SCREW, Flange Lock 1/4-20 x 3/4" Long ................................... 2 415 P 150828 237 NUT, Hex jam 3/4-16 ................................................................... 4 816 P 93912 235 SCREW, Flange Lock #10-24 x 1/2" Long .................................. 2 417 P 708541 001 WASHER, Flat ............................................................................. 1 218 P 93927 091 ASSEMBLY, Door Cable ............................................................. 1 219 P 150475 630 NUT, Hex Machine, #10-24 x 1/2" Long ...................................... 2 4

10-12764330-117

Figure 10-4. Free Standing Cabinet Assembly, Hinge Door

3637

5

28

336

3234

1132

34

12

4 36

37

2833

181

34

38

21

30

34

32343438

26

27

25

22

29

33

18

29

33 19

29

33

24

914

3234

32

34

39

32

12

20

16

34

3832

34

14

32

2933

8

32

3429

3318

15

10

2933

22

22

25 2627

23

7

20 2130

34

32

34

13

39

10-13764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-4- FREE STANDING CABINET ASM., 36" LEFT HINGE DOOR ... XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 48" RIGHT HINGE DOOR .. XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 48" LEFT HINGE DOOR .... XFREE STANDING CABINET ASMY, 60" RIGHT HINGE DOOR XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 60" LEFT HINGE DOOR .... X

1 P 146665 778 PANEL, Left, Front Side ............................................................... 1 1 1 1 12 P 146665 779 PANEL, Right, Front Side ............................................................ 1 1 1 1 13 P 146665 791 PANEL, Rear, Side ...................................................................... 2 – – – –

P 146665 772 PANEL, Rear, Side ...................................................................... – 2 2 – –P 146665 794 PANEL, Rear, Side ...................................................................... – – – 2 2

4 P 146665 780 PANEL, Top Front ........................................................................ 1 1 1 1 15 P 146665 804 PANEL, Top Rear ........................................................................ 1 – – – –

P 146665 784 PANEL, Top Rear ........................................................................ – 1 1 – –P 146665 799 PANEL, Top Rear ........................................................................ – – – 1 1

6 P 146665 800 SUPPORT, Left, Panel ................................................................ 1 – – – –P 146665 775 SUPPORT, Left, Panel ................................................................ – 1 1 – –P 146665 795 SUPPORT, Left, Panel ................................................................ – – – 1 1

7 P 146665 801 SUPPORT, Right, Panel .............................................................. 1 – – – –P 146665 776 SUPPORT, Right, Panel .............................................................. – 1 1 – –P 146665 796 SUPPORT, Right, Panel .............................................................. – – – 1 1

8 P 146665 769 UPRIGHT, Rear ........................................................................... 2 2 2 2 29 P 146665 802 BRACKET, Left, Strike ................................................................. 1 – – – –

P 146665 777 BRACKET, Left, Strike ................................................................. – 1 1 – –P 146665 797 BRACKET, Left, Strike ................................................................. – – – 1 1

10 P 146665 803 BRACKET, Right, Strike .............................................................. 1 – – – –P 146665 781 BRACKET, Right, Strike .............................................................. – 1 1 – –P 146665 798 BRACKET, Right, Strike .............................................................. – – – 1 1

11 P 136816 089 BRACKET, Top, Support ............................................................. 1 1 1 1 112 P 136816 083 BRACKET, Left, Rear Upright Support ........................................ 2 – 2 – 2

P 136816 090 BRACKET, Left, Rear Upright Support ........................................ – 2 – 2 –13 P 136816 084 BRACKET, Right, Rear Upright Support ...................................... 2 – 2 – 2

P 136816 091 BRACKET, Right, Rear Upright Support ...................................... – 2 – 2 –14 P 136816 085 BRACKET, Left, Front Bottom ..................................................... 1 – 1 – 2

P 136816 092 BRACKET, Left, Front Bottom ..................................................... – 1 – 1 –15 P 136816 086 BRACKET, Right, Front Bottom ................................................... 1 – 1 – 1

P 136816 093 BRACKET, Right, Front Bottom ................................................... – 1 – 1 –16 P 136816 087 BRACKET, Left, Front Top .......................................................... 1 – 1 – 1

P 136816 094 BRACKET, Left, Front Top .......................................................... – 1 – 1 –17 P 136816 088 BRACKET, Right, Front Top ........................................................ 1 – 1 – 1

P 136816 095 BRACKET, Right, Front Top ........................................................ – 1 – 1 –18 P 93927 071 SUPPORT, Strike Bracket ........................................................... 2 2 2 2 219 P 93927 085 BRACKET, Leveling Pad ............................................................. 1 1 1 1 120 P 93927 086 PLATE, Support, Bracket, Mounting ............................................ 2 2 2 2 221 P 93927 087 PLATE, Support, Bracket, Mounting ............................................ 2 2 2 2 222 P 84298 001 CATCH, Magnetic ........................................................................ 18 18 18 18 1823 P 93927 026 GASKET....................................................................................... 2 2 2 2 224 P 129362 778 PAD, Leveling .............................................................................. 1 1 1 1 125 P 129362 863 STRIKE, Plate .............................................................................. 2 2 2 2 226 P 129352 069 RETAINER, Nut, #10-32 .............................................................. 4 4 4 4 427 P 93910 934 SCREW, Sems, #10-32 x 1/2" Long ............................................ 4 4 4 4 428 P 93912 240 SCREW, FL, Lock, #10-32 x 3/4" Long ....................................... 4 4 4 4 429 P 93912 239 SCREW, FL, Lock, #10-32 x 1/2" Long ....................................... 10 10 10 10 1030 P 129361 716 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 1" Long ........................................... 8 8 8 8 831 P 93912 243 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 1/2" Long ........................................ 8 6 8 6 832 P 129360 011 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 5/8" Long ........................................ 32 32 32 32 3233 P 129360 016 NUT, FL, Lock, #10-32................................................................. 14 14 14 14 14


10-15764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-4- FREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 36" LEFT HINGE DOOR .... XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 48" RIGHT HINGE DOOR .. XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM 48" LEFT HINGE DOOR ..... XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 60" RIGHT HINGE DOOR .. XFREE STANDING CABINET ASM, 60" LEFT HINGE DOOR .... X

34 P 129360 015 NUT, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 .................................................................. 44 44 44 44 4435 P 10445 091 WASHER, Flat, 11/16" OD x .260 ID x .051 Thick ....................... 6 6 6 6 636 P 43255 001 SCREW, Cap, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4" Long ............................................ 6 8 8 8 837 P 93912 225 SCREW, FL, Lock, #10-32 x 3/8" Long ....................................... 8 8 8 8 838 P 150828 313 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 3/4" Long ........................................ 8 4 8 4 8

(Continued)

10-16764330-117

Figure 10-5. Cabinet Assembly, Sliding Door

293 3 29

5

21 26

2

15

1

18

19

20

15

2527

11 1323 27

14

6

25

27

2226

22 26

11

722

26

11

8

21

22 4

25

27

18

10 1314

2327

15

2

6

19

20

2226

11

2527

17

25 27

9

31

10

12

31

1 15

2226

7

11

30

30

10-17764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-5- CABINET ASSEMBLY, 36" LEFT HAND SLIDING DOOR ........ XCABINET ASSEMBLY, 48" LEFT HAND SLIDING DOOR ........ X

1 P 146665 771 PANEL, Front, Side ...................................................................... 2 22 P 146665 791 PANEL, Rear, Side ...................................................................... 2 –

P 46665 772 PANEL, Rear, Side ...................................................................... – 23 P 146665 792 PANEL, 36" Top ........................................................................... 2 –

P 146665 773 PANEL, 48" Top ........................................................................... – 24 P 146665 789 SUPPORT, Left, Panel ................................................................ 1 –

P 146665 767 SUPPORT, Left, Panel ................................................................ – 15 P 146665 790 SUPPORT, Right, Panel .............................................................. 1 –

P 146665 768 SUPPORT, Right, Panel .............................................................. – 16 P 146665 769 UPRIGHT, Rear ........................................................................... 2 27 P 146665 793 BRACKET, Strike ......................................................................... 1 –

146665 770 BRACKET, Strike ......................................................................... – 18 P 136816 080 BRACKET, Top, Support ............................................................. 1 19 P 136816 081 BRACKET, Left, Rear Upright Support ........................................ 2 2

10 P 136816 082 BRACKET, Right, Rear Upright Support ...................................... 2 211 P 93927 071 SUPPORT, Strike Bracket ........................................................... 4 412 P 93927 085 BRACKET, Leveling Pad ............................................................. 1 113 P 93927 086 PLATE, Support, Bracket, Mounting ............................................ 2 214 P 93927 087 PLATE, Support, Bracket, Mounting ............................................ 2 215 P 84298 001 CATCH, Magnetic ........................................................................ 18 1816 P 93927 026 GASKET....................................................................................... 2 217 P 129362 778 PAD, Leveling .............................................................................. 1 118 P 129362 863 STRIKE, Plate .............................................................................. 2 219 P 129352 069 RETAINER, Nut, #10-32 .............................................................. 4 420 P 93910 934 SCREW, Sems, #10-32 x 1/2" Long ............................................ 4 421 P 93912 240 SCREW, FL, Lock, #10-32 x 3/4" Long ....................................... 8 822 P 93912 239 SCREW, FL, Lock, #10-32 x 1/2" Long ....................................... 12 1223 P 129361 716 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 1" Long ........................................... 8 824 P 93912 243 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 1/2" Long ........................................ 8 825 P 129360 011 SCREW, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 x 5/8" Long ........................................ 22 2226 P 129360 016 NUT, FL, Lock, #10-32................................................................. 20 2027 P 129360 015 NUT, FL, Lock, 1/4-20 .................................................................. 30 3028 P 10445 091 WASHER, Flat, 11/16" OD x .260 ID x .051 Thick ....................... 8 829 P 43255 001 SCREW, Cap, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4" Long ............................................ 8 830 P 93912 225 SCREW, FL, Lock, #10-32 x 3/8" Long ....................................... 8 8

10-18764330-117

Figure 10-6. Final Piping Assembly, Upper Back

7

10

6

9

18

19

123

21

1314

4

17

4

8

15

5

17

5

14

36" Single Door Shown

11 S1

S2

23

24

2520

21

22

10-19764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-6- FINAL PIPING ASSEMBLY, 36" SINGLE DOOR ............... XFINAL PIPING ASSEMBLY, 36" DOUBLE DOOR ............. XFINAL PIPING ASSEMBLY, 48" SINGLE DOOR ............... XFINAL PIPING ASSEMBLY, 48" DOUBLE DOOR ............. XFINAL PIPING ASSEMBLY, 60" SINGLE DOOR ............... XFINAL PIPING ASSEMBLY, 60" DOUBLE DOOR ............. X

1 P 146660 546 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Steam to Chamber (See Figure 10-7) – 1 – – – –2 P 146660 459 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Steam to Chamber (See Figure 10-7) 1 – 1 1 1 13 P 051759 091 FITTING, Union, Solder, 1" NPT x 1" NOM. ........................ – 1 – 1 – 14 P 000939 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/4" NPT x 1/8" NPT ......................... 2 2 2 2 2 25 P 003440 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/4" NPT.......................................................... – 1 – 1 – 16 P 044492 091 FITTING, Elbow, Solder, 1" NOM. ....................................... 1 – 1 – 1 –7 P 044490 091 FITTING, Elbow, Solder, 1" NPT x 1" NOM. ........................ 1 1 1 1 1 18 P 093921 267 TUBE, 1-1/8" ODT ............................................................... 1 – – – – –9 P 093921 268 TUBE, 1-1/8" ODT ............................................................... – – 1 – 1 –

10 P 093921 269 TUBE, 1-1/8" ODT ............................................................... 1 – 1 – 1 –11 P 136816 043 TUBE, Steam to Chamber ................................................... – 1 – 1 – 112 P 082288 001 FITTING, Union, Elbow solder, 1" NPT x 1" NOM. .............. 1 – 1 – 1 –13 P 001615 091 ELBOW, Street, 90°, 1/8" NPT ............................................ 1 1 1 1 1 114 P 129373 841 ELBOW, Street, 45°, 1/8" NPT ............................................ 1 1 1 1 1 115 P 028903 091 NIPPLE, 1/8" NPT x 3" Long ................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 116 P 045060 091 CROSS, 1/4" NPT ................................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 117 P 007872 051 GAUGE, Chamber, 1/8" NPT (PG1) .................................... 1 1 1 1 1 118 P 093927 078 INSULATION, Tube ............................................................. 1 – – – – –19 P 093927 079 INSULATION, Tube ............................................................. – – 1 – 1 –20 P 146660 550 BAFFLE, Steam, Single Door (SB1) .................................... 1 – 1 – 1 –21 P 146660 497 BAFFLE, Steam, Double Door (SB1) ................................... – 1 – 1 – 122 P 129363 176 NUT, Flange, Lock, 1/4-20 ................................................... – 4 – 4 – 423 P 129373 379 SCREW, Hex Head, 5/8-11 x 1" Long ................................. 1 – 1 – 1 –24 P 19692 061 WASHER, 5/8" ..................................................................... 1 – 1 – 1 –25 P 129373 518 WASHER, Flat ..................................................................... 1 – 1 – 1 –

10-20764330-117

Figure 10-7. Piping Assembly, Steam to Chamber

Section A-A

11

1312

10

9

4 6 8

6

3

7

5

2

1

2

Section A-A

1113

1210

9

4

68

6

3

7

5

2

1

36" Double Door

36" Single Door48" Single & Double Door60" Single & Double Door

10-21764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-7- PIPING ASSEMBLY, STEAM TO CHAMBER, 36" DD ...... XPIPING ASSEMBLY, STEAM TO CHAMBER, 36" SD, 48" SD & DD, 60" SD & DD .............................. X X X X X

1 P 089168 091 ELBOW, Union, 1" NPT, Male/Female ................................ 1 1 1 1 1 12 P 029380 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 1-1/4" Long ............................................ 2 2 2 2 2 23 P 093911 331 VALVE, Solenoid, 1" NPT (S2) ............................................ 1 1 1 1 1 1

P 764317 688 • KIT, SolenoidP 764323 941 • KIT, Coil

4 P 003439 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/8" NPT.......................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 15 P 004936 091 TEE, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1" NPT x 3/4" NPT ...................... 1 1 1 1 1 16 P 029291 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 1-1/4" NPT .......................................... 2 2 2 2 2 27 P 118282 091 ELBOW, Straight, 45°, 1" NPT ............................................. 1 1 1 1 1 18 P 150828 444 VALVE, Check, 3/4" NPT (CK1) .......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 19 P 001636 091 ELBOW, Street, 3/4" NPT .................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 1

10 P 093911 329 VALVE, Solenoid, 3/4" NPT (S1) ......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 1P 764324 895 • KIT, SolenoidP 764323 941 • KIT, Coil

11 P 101006 172 FILTER, Air, 3/8" NPT (F1) .................................................. 1 1 1 1 1 112 P 006209 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 3/4" NPT x 3/8" NPT ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 113 P 029013 091 NIPPLE, 3/8" NPT x 1" Long ................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 1

10-22764330-117

Figure 10-8. Final Piping Assembly, Upper Middle

6

5

4

3

1

7

8

9

2

9

16

10

13

11

14

12

14

20

15

9

17

18

921

17

14

11

14

15

17

9 1516

14

14

1919

PS1PS2

21

RV1

PT1

PT1

10-23764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY


1 P 1639 091 ELBOW, Street, 1" NPT ....................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 12 P 93921 266 VALVE, Safety, 1" NPTM x 1-1/4" NPTF (RV1) ................... 1 1 1 1 1 13 P 29354 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 1-1/2" Long ............................................ 1 1 1 1 1 14 P 329846 091 ELBOW, Street, 1-1/4" NPT ................................................. 1 1 1 1 1 15 P 150474 152 FITTING, Union, Solder, 1-1/4" NPT x 1-1/4" NOM ............. 1 1 1 1 1 16 P 93921 287 TUBE, 1-3/8" ODT ............................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 17 P 4940 091 TEE, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1/2" NPT x 1" NPT ...................... 1 1 1 1 1 18 P 76053 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 1/4" NPT ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 19 P 150828 004 TEE, Street, 1/4" NPT .......................................................... 2 4 2 4 2 4

10 P 28920 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 1-3/4" Long ......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 111 P 4906 091 TEE, 1/4" NPT ...................................................................... 1 2 1 2 1 212 P 939 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/4" NPT x 1/8" NPT ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 113 P 7871 051 GAUGE, Jacket, 1/8" NPT (PG2) ......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 114 P 3440 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/4" NPT.......................................................... 2 5 2 5 2 515 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long............................................. 2 3 2 3 2 316 P 129376 156 SWITCH, Pressure, 1/4" NPT (PS1 & PS2) ........................ 1 1 1 1 1 117 P 1619 091 ELBOW, 90°, 1/4" NPT ........................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 118 P 22472 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 3/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 119 P 27422 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 1-1/4" Long ......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 120 P 78821 061 PLUG, Pipe, 1" NPT ............................................................. 1 1 1 1 1 121 P 136816 078 TRANSDUCER, Chamber Pressure (PT1) .......................... 1 1 1 1 1 1

10-24764330-117

Figure 10-9. Final Piping Assembly, Steam Supply

2

1

3

1

6

7

11

12

12

13

49

10

5

S9

S35

S36

10-25764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY


1 P 146660 457 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Steam to Seal (See Figure 10-10) ...... 1 1 1 1 1 12 P 146660 461 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Steam to Jacketl (See Figure 10-11) . 1 1 1 1 1 13 P 93910 479 VALVE, Solenoid, 1/4" NPT (S36) ....................................... – 2 – 2 – 2

P 764076 001 • KIT, RepairP 764323 942 • KIT, Coil

4 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long............................................. – 4 – 4 – 45 P 129367 215 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/4" ODT .................. – 3 – 3 – 36 P 93909 642 SUPPORT, Pipe .................................................................. 2 2 2 2 2 27 P 150822 280 NIPPLE, Solid, 1/4" NPT x 2-3/8" Long ............................... 1 1 1 1 1 18 P 129306 792 U-BOLT, 1/4-20 .................................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 19 P 129360 011 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 5/8" Long .......................... 1 1 1 1 1 1

10 P 129360 015 NUT, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 .................................................... 2 2 2 2 2 211 NAMEPLATE, Stamp12 P 9448 045 SCREW, Drive, Type U, #4 x 1/4" Long .............................. 6 6 6 6 6 613 PLATE, CRN

10-26764330-117

1 9

5

7

2

83

6

4

71

Figure 10-10. Assembly, Piping, Steam to Seal

10-27764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-10- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, STEAM TO SEAL .................................... X

1 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long..................................................... 22 P 45060 091 CROSS, 1/4" NPT ........................................................................ 13 P 939 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/4" NPT x 1/8" NPT ................................. 14 P 4906 091 TEE, 1/4" NPT .............................................................................. 15 P 93910 479 VALVE, Solenoid, 1/4" NPT, (S35) .............................................. 1

P 764076 001 • KIT, RepairP 764323 942 • KIT, Coil

6 P 28919 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 1-1/2" Long ................................................. 17 P 3440 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/4" NPT.................................................................. 28 P 26181 091 FITTING, Compression Elbow, 1/8" NPT x 1/8" ODT .................. 19 P 129367 215 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/4" ODT .......................... 1

10-28764330-117

24

3 1

5

6

7

8

24

12

11

9

10

1415 13

16

21

19

25

18

25

17

20

4

22

25

26

23

Figure 10-11. Assembly, Piping, Steam to Jacket

PR1

TR3

MV2

ST2

10-29764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-11- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, STEAM TO JACKET ............................... X

1 P 89168 091 ELBOW, Union, 1" NPT M/F ........................................................ 12 P 29364 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 4" Long ........................................................... 13 P 93911 331 VALVE, Solenoid, 1"NPT (S9) ..................................................... 1

P 764317 688 • KIT, RepairP 764323 941 • COIL

4 P 3439 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/8" NPT.................................................................. 25 P 29354 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT, x 1-1/2" Long ................................................... 16 P 1637 091 ELBOW, Reducing, 1" NPT x 3/4" NPT ....................................... 17 P 29302 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 4" Long ........................................................ 18 P 1635 091 ELBOW, 90°, 3/4" NPT ................................................................ 19 P 29292 981 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 1-1/2" Long ................................................. 1

10 P 84323 001 TEE, Reducing, 3/4" NPT x 3/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT ........................ 111 P 28921 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 2" Long ........................................................ 112 P 129071 001 UNION, 1/4" NPT ......................................................................... 113 P 136816 215 REGULATOR, Steam, 3/4" NPT (PR1) ....................................... 1

P 754359 003 • KIT, Repair14 P 4247 091 SPUD, 3/4" NPT ........................................................................... 115 P 2903 091 NUT, SPUD .................................................................................. 116 P 29300 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT, 3-1/2" Long ................................................... 117 P 4920 091 TEE, Reducing, 3/4" NPT x 3/8" NPT x 3/4" NPT ........................ 118 P 93921 290 STRAINER,Steam, 3.4" NPT ....................................................... 1

P 764330 322 • SCREEN, United Brass19 P 93921 265 VALVE, Ball, Union, 3/4" NPT (MV2) ........................................... 120 P 29013 091 NIPPLE, 3/8" NPT x 1" Long ........................................................ 121 P 41067 091 TRAP,Steam, 3/8" NPT (TR3) ..................................................... 1

P 753679 091 • DISC22 P 849 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 3/8" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................................. 123 P 129373 464 CONNECTOR, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT ................ 124 P 26181 091 FITTING, Compression Elbow, 1/8" NPT x 1/8" ODT .................. 125 P 29290 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 1" Long ........................................................ 326 P 84450 001 COUPLING, Reducing, 1" NPT x 3/4" NPT ................................. 1

10-30764330-117

Figure 10-12. Final Piping Assembly, Lower

S43

S46

S7

S3

S40

S37

S38

S4

6

12

1210

27

28

4212 10 6

5453

543

12

40 48

49

24

22

232

14 31 32

15 32

25

5011

12

8

12

710

4611

47

1

5

45

1334

15

1

1617

19

21

1820

8

52

29

4445 43

14

38

34

1433

3730

2636

56

41

10-31764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY


1 P 146660 527 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Vacuum Pump/Heat Exchanger (See Figure 10-15) ............................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 P 146660 519 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Chamber Drain (See Figure 10-16) .... 1 1 1 1 1 13 P 146660 524 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Jacket Drain (See Figure 10-17) ........ 1 1 1 1 1 14 P 146660 525 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Water, Inlet (See Figure 10-18) .......... 1 1 1 1 1 15 P 146660 526 ASSEMBLY, Piping, Pump Seal/Cooling Water

(See Figure 10-19) ............................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 16 P 150828 004 TEE, Street, 1/4" NPT .......................................................... – 2 – 2 – 27 P 4906 091 TEE, 1/4" NPT ...................................................................... – 1 – 1 – 18 P 93910 479 VALVE, Solenoid, 1/4" NPT (S43) ....................................... – 1 – 1 – 1


9 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long............................................. – 2 – 2 – 210 P 129367 592 CONNECTOR, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT ......... 1 1 1 1 1 111 P 44492 091 FITTING, Elbow, Solder, 1" Nom. ........................................ 1 1 1 1 1 112 P 129367 215 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/4" ODT .................. 2 2 2 2 2 213 P 129360 011 SCREW, Flange Lock, 1/4-20 x 5/8" Long .......................... 1 1 1 1 1 114 P 129360 015 NUT, Flange Lock ................................................................ 2 2 2 2 2 215 P 136816 023 SUPPORT, Pump ................................................................ – – – – 2 216 P 136816 024 SUPPORT, Pump ................................................................ – – 2 2 – –17 P 136816 025 SUPPORT, Pump ................................................................ 2 2 – – – –18 P 93912 276 SCREW, Flange Lock, 3/8-16 x 1-1/2" Long ....................... 2 2 2 2 2 219 P 129361 715 SCREW, Flange Lock, 5/6-18 x 3/4" Long .......................... 6 6 6 6 6 620 P 129367 225 SCREW, Shoulder Socket Head, 1/2" Dia, x 3/4" Long ...... 2 2 2 2 2 221 P 90441 045 WASHER, Flat ..................................................................... 4 4 4 4 4 422 P 850 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1-1/4" NPT x 1" NPT ........................ 1 1 1 1 1 123 P 29380 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 1-1/4" Long ............................................ 1 1 1 1 1 124 P 93922 107 RTD, Probe, Dual Element, Chamber/Recorder (RTD1) ..... 1 1 1 1 1 125 P 44495 091 FITTING, Elbow, Solder, 3/4" Nom. ..................................... 1 1 1 1 1 126 P 129373 553 ELBOW, Straight, 45°, 1/4" NPT .......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 127 P 146660 533 ASSEMBLY, Funnel and Cap (See Figure 10-20) ............... 1 1 1 1 1 128 P 136816 054 ASSEMBLY, Mixing Tank .................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 129 P 93921 320 HOSE ................................................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 130 P 36061 091 CLAMP, Hose ...................................................................... 2 2 2 2 2 231 P 93927 020 PLATE, Pipe, Support .......................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 132 P 129360 793 U-BOLT, 1/4-20 .................................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 133 P 129363 155 U-BOLT, 1/4-20 .................................................................... 4 4 4 4 4 434 P 129373 531 U-BOLT, 1/4-20 .................................................................... 2 2 2 2 2 235 P 93911 351 ASSEMBLY, RTD, 2 Wire, Waste Water (RTD2) ................ 1 1 1 1 1 136 P 129373 555 CONNECTOR, Male, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 137 P 129373 532 PLATE, Mounting, U-Bolt ..................................................... 7 7 7 7 7 738 P 129373 533 PLATE, Mounting, U-Bolt ..................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 139 P 136816 061 BRACKET, Support, Mixing Tank ........................................ 1 1 1 1 1 140 P 51759 091 FITTING, Union, Solder, 1" NPT x 1" Nom. ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 141 P 48733 042 ASSEMBLY, Strainer ........................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 142 P 129373 554 CLAMP, Hose ...................................................................... 2 2 2 2 2 243 P 1636 091 ELBOW, Street, 3/4" NPT .................................................... 2 2 2 2 2 244 P 84450 001 COUPLING, Reducing, 1" NPT x 3/4" NPT ......................... 1 1 1 1 1 145 P 29290 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 1" Long ................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 146 P TUBE, 1-1/8" ODT ............................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 1


10-32764330-117

Figure 10-12. Final Piping Assembly, Lower (continued)

42

35

39

RTD2

10-33764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY


47 P TUBE, 1-1/8" ODT ............................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 148 P TUBE, 1-1/8" ODT ............................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 149 P TUBE, 7/8" ODT ................................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 150 P TUBE, 7/8" ODT ................................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 151 P 28928 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 3/4" Long............................................. 1 1 1 1 1 152 P 6263 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1/2" NPT ............................ 1 1 1 1 1 153 P 29172 091 NIPPLE, 1/2' NPT x 3-1/2" Long .......................................... 1 1 1 1 1 154 P 93911 351 ASSEMBLY, Probe, RTD, 2 Wire, Jacket (RTD3) ............... 1 1 1 1 1 155 P 93921 069 SWITCH, Level, Chamber Flood (Not Shown) .................... * * * * * *56 P 48733 042 STRAINER, Chamber Drain ................................................ 1 1 1 1 1 1

10-34764330-117

Figure 10-13. Assembly, Tubing

10-35764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-13- ASSEMBLY, TUBING ................................................................. X

1 R 003500 525 TUBING, Teflon, 3/16" I.D. x .030" Wall x 1/4" ODT.................... A/R2 R 000915 043 TUBE, Soft Annealed Copper, 1/8" ODT x .030" Wall ................. A/R3 R 003500 774 TUBING, Teflon, 1/4" I.D. x .062" Wall x 3/8" ODT ...................... A/R

10-36764330-117

22

3

75

26

2914

37 3635

34

30

33 26

827

28

20 10 2119

18

4

2

514

325

24

23

17

15

1316

30

326

79 11

12

1

31

Figure 10-14. Assembly, Piping, Vacuum Pump/Heat Exchanger

CK8

VP1

HX1

CK2

FC2

10-37764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-14- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, VACUUM PUMP/HEAT EXCHANGER ............................................................................ X

1 P 136816 034 PUMP, Vacuum, 2 H.P. (VP1) ..................................................... 12 P 136816 022 EXCHANGER, Heat (HX1) .......................................................... 13 P 129373 501 FITTING, Adapter, Solder, 1" NPT x 3/4" Nom. ........................... 24 P 83449 002 TUBE, 7/8" ODT x 2-1/4" Long .................................................... 15 P 44507 091 FITTING, Elbow, Straight, Solder, 3/4" Nom. .............................. 36 P 44846 091 FITTING, Union, Solder, 3/4" NPT x 3/4" Nom ............................ 17 P 84323 001 TEE, Reducing, 3/4" NPT x 3/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT ........................ 18 P 129373 463 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT .......................... 19 P 29290 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 1" NPT ........................................................ 1

10 P 93911 328 VALVE, Solenoid, 3/4" NPT (S4) ................................................. 1P 764072 001 • KIT, RepairP 764323 940 • COIL

11 P 3439 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/8" NPT.................................................................. 212 P 91158 091 FITTING, Adapter, Solder, 3/4" Nom. .......................................... 113 P 129373 464 CONNECTOR, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT ................ 114 P 329846 091 ELBOW, Street, 1-1/4" NPT ......................................................... 215 P 81108 001 NIPPLE, 1-1/4" NPT x 1-1/2 Long ............................................... 116 P 40255 091 TEE, Reducing, 1-1/4" NPT x 3/4" NPT x 1-1/4" NPT ................. 117 P 91230 091 FITTING, Union Elbow, Solder, 3/4" NPT x 3/4" Nom ................. 118 P 30909 091 TUBE, 7/8" ODT x 10-1/2" Long .................................................. 119 P 84456 001 FITTING, Elbow, 45°, Solder, 3/4" Nom. ..................................... 120 P 91384 091 TUBE, 7/8" ODT x 6" Long .......................................................... 121 P 44495 091 FITTING, Elbow, 90°, Solder, 3/4" Nom. ..................................... 122 P 91307 091 TUBE, 7/8" ODT x 4-1/8" Long .................................................... 123 P 850 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1-1/4" NPT x 1" NPT ................................ 124 P 1639 091 ELBOW, Street, 1" NPT ............................................................... 125 P 89168 091 ELBOW, Union, 1" NPTM x 1" NPTF ........................................... 126 P 4940 091 TEE, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1/2" NPT x 1" NPT .............................. 127 P 29380 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 1-1/4" Long .................................................... 128 P 150828 446 VAVLE, Check, 1" NPT (CK8) ..................................................... 129 P 129373 512 NIPPLE, Pipe, 1-1/4" NPT x 2-1/2" Long ..................................... 130 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long..................................................... 231 P 1618 091 ELBOW, 90°, 1/4" NPT ................................................................ 132 P 1619 091 ELBOW, Street, 1/4" NPT ............................................................ 133 P 76053 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................................. 134 P 83521 001 VALVE, Check, 1/4" NPT (CK2) .................................................. 135 P 939 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/4" NPT x 1/8" NPT ................................. 136 P 28902 091 NIPPLE, 1/8" NPT x 2-1/2" Long ................................................. 137 P 83630 001 VALVE, Needle, 1/8" NPT (FC2) ................................................. 1

10-38764330-117

Figure 10-15. Assembly, Piping, Chamber Drain

1124

12

13

30

6 3

22

215

1

2

5

432

11

1911

14

15

13

27

31

23

18

425

18

17

13 16

13

2611

1210

7

29

9

813

28

24

27

20

View At A

A

10-39764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-15- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, CHAMBER DRAIN .................................. X

1 P 89168 091 ELBOW, Union, 1" NPT x 1" NPT ................................................ 12 P 1351 091 CROSS, 1" NPT ........................................................................... 13 P 93911 327 VALVE, Solenoid, 1" NPT (S3) .................................................... 1


4 P 4940 091 TEE, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1/2" NPT x 1" NPT .............................. 25 P 29380 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 1-1/4" Long .................................................... 26 P 29364 091 NIPPLE, 1" NPT x 4" Long ........................................................... 17 P 1639 091 ELBOW, Street, 1" NPT ............................................................... 18 P 6263 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1/2" NPT .................................... 19 P 29162 091 NIPPLE, 1/2" NPT x 1" Long ........................................................ 1

10 P 150822 333 CROSS, 1/2" NPT ........................................................................ 111 P 76053 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................................. 412 P 3440 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/4" NPT.................................................................. 213 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long..................................................... 514 P 93918 212 VALVE, Ball, 1/4" NPT (MV3) ...................................................... 115 P 129373 463 ELBOW, Tube Coupling,1/4" NPT x 3/4" ODT ............................ 116 P 1619 091 ELBOW, Street, 1/4" NPT ............................................................ 117 P 93910 478 VALVE, Solenoid, 1/4" NPT (S40) ............................................... 1


18 P 129367 215 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/4" ODT .......................... 219 P 150822 930 BUSHING, Reducing, 1" NPT x 1/4" NPT .................................... 120 P 19376 095 FITTING,Reducing ....................................................................... 121 P 3439 091 PLUG, Pipe, 1/8" NPT.................................................................. 122 P 129353 325 PLUG, Pipe, 1/8" NPT.................................................................. 123 P 51761 091 FITTING, Adapter, Solder, 1" NPT x 1" Nom ............................... 124 P 150828 004 TEE, Street, 1/4" NPT .................................................................. 225 P 129222 001 TRAP, Steam, 1/2" NPT (TR1) .................................................... 1

P 764080 001 • KIT, Repair26 P 1634 091 ELBOW, Street, 1/2" NPT ............................................................ 127 P 129367 592 CONNECTOR, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 1/4" ODT ................ 228 P 150829 501 VALVE, Check, 1/4" NPT (CK4) .................................................. 129 P 129373 464 CONNECTOR, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT ................ 130 P 93910 479 VALVE, Soleniod, 1/4" NPT (S37) ............................................... 1


31 P 4906 091 TEE, 1/4" NPT .............................................................................. 132 P 837 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 3.8" NPT ................................. 1

10-40764330-117

Figure 10-16. Assembly, Piping, Jacket Drain

99

9

4

312

1

2

10

6

11 8 8 7

6

TR2

CK3

ST3

10-41764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-16- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, JACKET DRAIN ...................................... X

1 P 4931 091 TEE, 1/2" NPT .............................................................................. 12 P 837 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 3/8" NPT ................................. 13 P 150828 459 STRAINER, Steam, 1/2" NPT (ST3) ............................................ 1

P 764326 663 • SCREEN, ConbracoP 764326 727 • o-Ring, ConbracoP 764317 906 • SCREEN, Sarco

4 P 129222 001 TRAP, Steam, 1/2" NPT (TR3) .................................................... 1P 764080 001 • KIT, Repair

5 P 1634 091 ELBOW, Street, 1/2" NPT ............................................................ 16 P 10278 091 VALVE, Check, 1/4" NPT (CK3) .................................................. 17 P 76053 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 1/2" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................................. 18 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long..................................................... 29 P 129373 463 ELBOW, Tube, Couping, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT ........................... 3

10 P 129376 095 FITTING, RTD .............................................................................. 111 P 45060 091 CROSS, 1/4" NPT ........................................................................ 112 P 29162 091 NIPPLE, 1/2" NPT x 1" Long ........................................................ 1

10-42764330-117

Figure 10-17. Assembly, Piping, Water Inlet

2

1

3

4

8

10

9

7 5 6

5

3

MV1

MV1

ST1 CK5

10-43764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-17- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, WATER INLET ........................................ X

1 P 93918 066 VALVE, Ball, 3/4" NPT (MV1) ...................................................... 12 P 29311 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 6-1/4" Long ................................................. 13 P 1636 091 ELBOW, Street, 3/4" NPT ............................................................ 24 P 47708 091 STRAINER, Water, 3/4" NPT (ST1) ............................................. 1

P 754616 091 • SCREEN, SarcoP 764326 673 • SCREEN, United Brass

5 P 29291 091 NIPPLE, 3/4" NPT x 1-1/4" Long ................................................. 26 P 83870 001 VALVE, Check, Popplet, 3/4" NPT (CK5) .................................... 17 P 84323 001 TEE, Reducing, 3/4" NPT x 3/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT ........................ 18 P 91230 091 FITTING, Union, Elbow, Solder, 3/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................ 19 P 28919 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 1-1/2" Long ................................................. 1

10 P 129071 001 UNION, 1/4" NPT ......................................................................... 1

10-44764330-117

Figure 10-18. Assembly, Piping, Pump Seal/Cooling Water

52 3

7 6 7

8

2

8

244 3

2

1

S7

S46

FC1

S7 S46

5

10-45764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-18- ASSEMBLY, PIPING, PUMP SEAL/COOLING WATER ............ X

1 P 1619 091 ELBOW, Street, 1/4" NPT ............................................................ 12 P 28916 091 NIPPLE, 1/4" NPT x 7/8" Long..................................................... 43 P 150828 004 TEE, Street, 1/4" NPT .................................................................. 24 P 93910 479 VALVE, Solenoid, 1/4" NPT (S7 & S46) ...................................... 2


5 P 129376 156 SWITCH, Pressure, 1/4" NPT (PS3) ............................................ 16 P 764328 968 RESTRICTOR, Flow, 3/8" NPT (FC1) ......................................... 17 P 849 091 BUSHING, Reducing, 3/8" NPT x 1/4" NPT ................................. 28 P 129373 462 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT .......................... 2

10-46764330-117

Figure 10-19. Assembly, Funnel and Cap

5

4

4

7

7

3

1

5

6

2

4

10-47764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-19- 146660 533 ASSEMBLY, FUNNEL AND CAP ............................................... X

1 P 136816 045 MODIFICATION, Drain Funnel .................................................... 12 P 136816 044 CAP, Funnel ................................................................................. 13 P 15272 091 SCREW, Set, Hex Socket Head, 1/4-12 x 1/2" Long ................... 24 P 78881 045 SCREW, Self Tapping, #6-32 x 1/2" Long ................................... 45 P 134468 930 INSERT, Funnel ........................................................................... 16 P 764319 967 CONNECTOR, Bulkhead ............................................................. 17 P 129373 463 ELBOW, Tube, Coupling, 1/4" NPT x 3/8" ODT .......................... 2

10-48764330-117

Figure 10-20. Assembly, Power Input Box Platform

4 1 2010

8

12

9

65

2

3

7

15

1711

8

7 22

4

14

15

16

21

14

16

18

12

19

14

12

19

Earlier Units

Later Untis

10-49764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-20- 146660 563 ASSEMBLY, POWER INPUT BOX PLATFORM ........................ X

1 P 136816 058 BOX, Pull, Mocified with Cover .................................................... 12 P 129373 544 BLOCK, Terminal ......................................................................... 13 P 129363 141 SCREW, Round Head, #6-32 x 1" Long ...................................... 24 P 84121 004 NUT, Keps, #6-32 ........................................................................ 65 P 93921 377 RELAY, Solid State, 3 Phase ...................................................... 16 P 129373 545 PAD, Thermal Insulation .............................................................. 17 P 93908 037 SCREW, Sems, #8-32 x 1/2" Long .............................................. 68 P 129359 531 NUT, Keps, #8-32 ........................................................................ 69 P 82675 001 SCREW, Hex Head, (Green Ground) .......................................... 1

10 P 129360 016 NUT, Flange, #10-32 ................................................................... 111 P 129360 483 STICKER, Ground ....................................................................... 112 P 19522 091 TERMINAL, Ring, #10 Stud, 22-16 AWG .................................... 713 P 93927 040 BREAKER, Circut ........................................................................ 114 P 93927 024 ASSEMBLY, Internal Cable ......................................................... 115 P 93908 034 SCREW, Sems, #6-32 x 1/2" Long .............................................. 416 P 93927 073 ASSEMBLY, Internal Cable ......................................................... 117 P 93927 041 BASE, Mounting ........................................................................... 118 P 90619 091 TERMINAL, Ring, #6 Stud, 22-16 AWG ...................................... 119 P 387345 929 FERRULE, Wire, 22 AWG, Single Conductor Insulation ............. 120 P 129373 560 LABEL, Marking ........................................................................... 121 P 93908 041 SCREW, Sems, #4-20 x 3/8" Long .............................................. 422 P 84121 001 NUT, Keps, #4-40 ........................................................................ 4

10-50764330-117

Figure 10-21. Control Box Assembly

10-51764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-21- CONTROL BOX ASSEMBLY ...................................................... X

1 P 136810 006 SUPPLY, Power2 P 84121 002 NUT, Keps, #63 P 93918 080 HARNESS, Wire, (J2/Fan)4 P 136809 744 HARNESS, Wire, (J42/J16)5 P 146656 185 BOARD, Control Assembly6 P 146657 779 BOARD, Connector Assembly7 P 93918 079 FAN, Cooling8 P 129367 525 FILTER, Air9 P 136809 737 GASKET, Control Box

10 P 136809 743 FAN, Adapter11 P 93908 039 SCREW, Sems #6-32 x 3/8" Long12 ASSEMBLY, I/O Board (Double Door requires 2 boards)13 P 136809 746 HARNESS, Wire, (J3B/J15B)14 P 136809 745 HARNESS, Wire, (J3A/J15A)15 P 93918 457 DECAL, Switch16 P 93911 576 SWITCH, Control (SW1)17 P 764317 825 FILTER, Line, F1, F2 (Power Supply)18 P 764317 463 FUSE, 5A (F3)19 P 129361 158 BLOCK, Terminal20 P 3966 041 SCREW, Round Head #6-32 x 1-1/4" Long21 P 19675 041 WASHER, Lock, #622 P 129367 492 LABEL, Terminal Block23 P 146657 777 HOUSING, Control24 P 93918 352 HOSE, Control Box (Not Shown)25 P 150371 001 DECAL, Disconnect Power (Not Shown)26 P 93918 187 LABEL, Warning Burn Hazard (Not Shown)27 P 93918 457 LABEL, Main Power (Not Shown)28 P 93918 099 LABEL, Warning Shock/Burn (Not Shown)

10-52764330-117

Figure 10-22. Display Control Housing Assembly

1

3

210

4

7

22

520

9

8

12

23

25

10-53764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-22- DISPLAY CONTROL HOUSING ASSEMBLY – PRINTER ........ XDISPLAY CONTROL HOUSING ASSEMBLY WITH POWER SUPPLY ...................................................................... X

1 HOUSING, Control2 P 93918 426 HOUSING, Printer, Assembly ...................................................... 1 –3 PLATE, Mounting4 P 145557 776 DOOR, Printer Access ................................................................. 1 15 P 93918 016 RETAINER, Paper, Roll ............................................................... 1 –6 P 129362 819 ROLL, Paper, Box of 3 (Not Shown) ............................................ 1 –7 P 093911 522 LABEL .......................................................................................... 1 18 P 93918 051 ASSEMBLY, Printer/Header ........................................................ 1 –9 P 093918 052 GASKET, Control Housing ........................................................... 1 1

10 P 093918 058 SPOOL, Assembly ....................................................................... 1 –11 P 084449 001 CATCH, Magnet ........................................................................... 1 112 P 093918 017 CLIP, Push-On ............................................................................. 4 –13 P 129367 469 ROD, Hinge .................................................................................. 1 114 P 129361 210 SCREW, Pan Head, #2-25 x 3/16" Long ..................................... 3 –15 P 043259 091 SCREW, Set, Socket Head, #6-32 x 3/16" Long ......................... 1 –16 P 129362 190 SCREW, Shoulder, #4-40 ............................................................ 2 217 P 150475 913 WASHER, Nylon .......................................................................... 3 318 P 084120 001 SCREW, Countersunk Head, #4-40 x 5/16" Long ....................... 1 119 P 093911 970 PLATE, Strike .............................................................................. 1 120 P 093918 213 STUD, Spool ................................................................................ 1 –21 P 045301 091 RING, Retaining ........................................................................... 1 122 P 93927 024 COVER, Mounting Plate .............................................................. – 123 P 136809 736 COVER, Door Opening ................................................................ – 124 P 129360 016 NUT, Flange, Lock #10-32 ........................................................... – 425 P 150828 440 RIBBON, Printer (Package of 2) .................................................. 1 –

10-54764330-117


12

6

2

13

11

5

10

9

6

7

6

134

8

6

8

9

14

10

11

13

3 1

15

16

17

18

19

15

16

17

18

19

Printer

10-55764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY


1 P 093918 021 HARNESS, I.C., 40 Circuit ........................................................... 1 12 P 136809 730 HARNESS, Wire, PTR/J44 .......................................................... 1 –3 P 093918 084 HARNESS, Wire, J4/CN2 ............................................................ 1 14 P 093918 064 HARNESS, Wire, J15/J42 ........................................................... 1 –5 P 129359 521 PLUG, 2 Position ......................................................................... 1 –6 P 084104 001 CABLE, Tie .................................................................................. 9 97 P 129326 001 MOUNT, Wire Tie ......................................................................... 4 –8 P 056401 557 GASKET, Housing Control .......................................................... 1 19 P 356256 782 SUPPLY, Power .......................................................................... 1 1

10 P 338522 108 CABLE, Ground ........................................................................... 1 111 P 356256 824 HARNESS Wire, DC Power Supply ............................................ 1 –12 P 93908 039 SCREW, Sems, #6-32 x 3/8" Long .............................................. 1 113 P 356256 825 WIRE, Harness, DC Power Supply ............................................. – 114 P 136816 062 BRACKET, Mounting, Power Supply .......................................... 1 115 P 93908 034 SCREW, Sems, #6-32 x 1/2" Long .............................................. 4 416 P 129352 094 SPACER, Nylon, #6 ..................................................................... 8 817 P 84121 002 NUT, Keps, #6-32 ........................................................................ 4 –18 P 129384 062 BARRIER ..................................................................................... 1 1

10-56764330-117

2

15

1

1318

3

4

17

16

19

10

205 7

24

119


10-57764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY


1 P 93918 041 GEARMOTOR, CW ...................................................................... 1 –2 P 93911 955 BRACKET, Speaker .................................................................... 1 13 P 93918 022 ASSEMBLY, Speaker .................................................................. 1 14 P 146657 754 BEZEL, Connector ....................................................................... 1 15 P 141214 630 ASSEMBLY, Display, Interface Board ......................................... 1 16 P 146656 182 BOARD, Printer Assembly ........................................................... 1 –7 P 084121 003 NUT, Keps, #4-40 ........................................................................ 2 –8 P 093912 152 STANDOFF, M x F, #6-32 x 3/8" Long ......................................... 4 –9 P 136809 735 DISPLAY, Module, Vacuum Flourescent .................................... 1 1

10 P 093912 157 STANDOFF, M x F, #6-32 x 1" Long ............................................ 2 211 P 136809 701 SCREEN, Touch .......................................................................... 1 112 P 093912 155 STANDOFF, M x F, #6-32 x 3/4" Long ......................................... 4 413 P 081673 004 WASHER, Flat, #6 x .032 Thick ................................................... 4 414 P 093918 206 SHIELD ........................................................................................ 1 115 P 093918 205 MAGNET, Spindle Assembly ....................................................... 1 –16 P 129361 899 STANDOFF, M x F, #4-40 x 3/16" Long ....................................... 1 117 P 129367 483 GASKET, Bezel ............................................................................ 1 118 P 093908 033 SCREW, Sems, #6-32 x 1/4" Long .............................................. 6 619 P 093908 032 SCREW, Sems, #4-40 x 1/2" Long .............................................. 6 620 P 084121 004 NUT, Keps, #6-32 ........................................................................ 14 1421 P 084114 002 WASHER, Flat, #6 x .032 Thick ................................................... 4 422 P 93912 151 STANDOFF, M x F, #6-32 x 1/4" Long ......................................... – 423 P 5469 041 WASHER, Flat, #6 ....................................................................... – 824 P 136809 730 HARNESS, Wire (PTR/J44) ......................................................... 1 –

10-58764330-117

Figure 10-25. Transfer Car Assembly

Section A-A

A

A

26

26

24

10 61111

20

25

28

24

12

40

528

4

33

34

29

30

2627

4124

33 37

43

822

8

735

38

2126

44

2

193

35

36

9

23

42

26

21

261

8

39

16

15

1413

28

29

30

18

22

21

10-59764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-25- TRANSFER CAR ASSEMBLY, 36 INCH .................................... XTRANSFER CAR ASSEMBLY, 48 INCH .................................... XTRANSFER CAR ASSEMBLY, 60 INCH .................................... X

1 P 56396 370 CASTER, Rigid ............................................................................ 2 2 22 P 56396 369 CASTER, Swivel .......................................................................... 2 2 23 P 25890 052 PLUG, Button ............................................................................... 2 2 24 P 136816 067 WELDMENT, Track, Right Hand ................................................. 1 – –

P 136816 065 WELDMENT, Track, Right Hand ................................................. – 1 –P 136816 063 WELDMENT, Track, Right Hand ................................................. – – 1

5 P 136816 071 ASSEMBLY, Track, Left Hand ..................................................... 1 – –P 136816 070 ASSEMBLY, Track, Left Hand ..................................................... – 1 –P 136816 069 ASSEMBLY, Track, Left Hand ..................................................... – – 1

6 P 56396 854 HANDLE....................................................................................... 1 1 17 P 141198 382 WELDMENT, Frame .................................................................... 1 1 1

P 141198 383 WELDMENT, Frame .................................................................... 1 1 1P 141198 384 WELDMENT, Frame .................................................................... 1 1 1

8 P 129353 322 E-Ring .......................................................................................... 2 2 29 P 36545 061 NUT, Hex, 5/16-18 ....................................................................... 4 4 4

10 P 91576 001 WELDMENT, Handle ................................................................... 1 – –P 91634 001 HANDLE, Rod .............................................................................. – 1 –P 91635 001 HANDLE, Rod .............................................................................. – – 1

11 P 43262 061 PIN Roll ........................................................................................ 2 2 212 P 91536 061 SPRING, Compression ................................................................ 1 1 113 P 3099 042 NUT, Hex, 3/8-16 ......................................................................... 1 1 114 P 91557 010 YOKE ........................................................................................... 1 1 115 P 91558 045 PIN, Clevis ................................................................................... 1 1 116 P 93927 037 WELDMENT, Shaft ...................................................................... 1 1 117 P 43058 091 BAG, Muslin ................................................................................. 1 1 118 P 129353 321 E-Ring .......................................................................................... 2 2 219 P 76884 091 TAG, Instruction, Handle Attachment .......................................... 1 1 120 P 150828 088 KNOB, Pull ................................................................................... 1 1 121 P 150828 812 WASHER, Lock, S.S., 3/4" ........................................................... 4 4 422 P 150828 051 AXLE ............................................................................................ 1 1 123 P 150828 090 BOLT, Carriage, 5/16-18 x 2-3/4" Long ....................................... 4 4 424 P 150828 237 NUT, Jam, 3/4-16 ......................................................................... 4 4 425 P 56401 018 TAG, Instruction ........................................................................... 1 1 126 P 150828 236 NUT, Hex, 3/4-16 ......................................................................... 8 8 827 P 93911 852 LABEL .......................................................................................... 2 2 228 P 150828 292 SPACER ...................................................................................... 2 3 329 P 3992 041 SCREW ........................................................................................ 4 6 630 P 20844 061 WASHER, Shim ........................................................................... A/R A/R A/R31 P LOCTITE, #222-31 ....................................................................... A/R A/R A/R32 P 129367 288 MANUAL, Equipment ................................................................... 1 1 133 P 129353 295 WASHER, Flat, .281 ID x .562 OD x .050 Thick .......................... 32 32 2334 P 150473 152 BOLT, Hex Head, 1/4-20 x 2" Long ............................................. 16 16 1635 P 19686 061 WASHER, Lock, 1/4" ................................................................... 22 24 2636 P 3097 041 NUT, Hex, UNC, 1/4-20 ............................................................... 6 8 1037 P 129361 385 SCREW, Hex Head, Plastic, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4" Long ...................... 6 8 1038 P 3041 051 NUT, Acorn, UNC, 1/4-20 ............................................................ 16 16 1639 P 134473 302 HOLDER, Shelf Front .................................................................. 2 2 440 P 134473 303 HOLDER, Shelf Rear ................................................................... 2 2 –41 P NAMEPLATE42 P 83737 001 SCREW, Drive, #6 x 1/4" Long .................................................... 2 2 243 P 141198 780 BAR, Shelf ................................................................................... 2 – –

P 141198 782 BAR, Shelf ................................................................................... – – 244 P 141198 783 SUPPORT, Shelf ......................................................................... 2 – –

P 141198 785 SUPPORT, Shelf ......................................................................... – – 2

10-60764330-117

Figure 10-26. Optional Loading Car Assembly

10-61764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-26- LOADING CAR 36" ..................................................................... XLOADING CAR 48" ..................................................................... XLOADING CAR 60" ..................................................................... X

1 P 141198 796 SHELF, 11-7/8" x 20" ................................................................... 9 12 152 P 141198 756 GATE, Side, 36" ........................................................................... 6 – –

P 1411981757 GATE, Side, 48" ........................................................................... – 6 –P 1411981757 GATE, Side, 60" ........................................................................... – – 6

3 P 141198 751 SUPORT, Shelf, 36" ..................................................................... 4 – –P 141198 751 SUPORT, Shelf, 48" ..................................................................... – 4 –P 141198 751 SUPORT, Shelf, 60" ..................................................................... – – 4

4 P 129361 387 RING, Retaining, End Gate .......................................................... 4 4 45 P 141198 791 GATE, End, 36", 48" 60" .............................................................. 2 2 26 P 91633 042 WHEEL ........................................................................................ 4 4 47 P 47636 061 BEARING, Roller, (11 per wheel) ................................................ A/R A/R A/R8 P 56401 537 AXLE ............................................................................................ 2 2 29 P 46038 061 PIN, Cotter ................................................................................... 4 4 4

10 P 129353 293 WASHER, Axle (Flat) ................................................................... A/R A/R A/R11 P 150828 230 MITT, Oven (Not Shown) ............................................................. A/R A/R A/R12 P 764329 959 GREASE ...................................................................................... A/R A/R A/R

10-62764330-117

Figure 10-27. Rack and Shelf Assembly

3 4 6

2

1

6

1

34

6

2

5

7

2

6

34

5

72

3

4

6

6

1 7 272

4

53

4

Double Door

3

5

2

3

1

4 6

1

63 4

8

2912 10 11

6

4

35

7

4

3

5

7 2

6

172

4

4

12

8

2

2

10-63764330-117

SVC


PARTNUMBER

UNITS PERASSEMBLY

10-27- RACK AND SHELF ASSEMBLY, 36" SINGLE DOOR .............. XRACK AND SHELF ASSEMBLY, 36" DOUBLE DOOR ............. X

1 P 146660 577 FRAME, Shelf .............................................................................. 2 –P 146660 576 FRAME, Shelf .............................................................................. – 2

2 P 93927 025 BAR, Tie ....................................................................................... 4 43 P 77561 061 SCREW, Set ................................................................................ 8 164 P 129373 543 SCREW, Button Head Cap, 1/4-20 x 5/6" Long .......................... 24 245 P 129353 310 SCREW, Hex Head, S.S., 1/4-20 x 1-1/4" Long .......................... 4 86 P 146657 644 SHELF ......................................................................................... 3 37 P 76239 061 NUT, Hex, 1/4-20 ......................................................................... 4 88 P 93912 242 SCREW, Flange, Lock, 1/4-20 x 3/8" Long ................................. 4 –9 P 150475 594 NUT, Hex, UNC, 1/4-20 ............................................................... 6 –

10 P 19687 061 WASHER, Lock, 1/4" ................................................................... 6 –11 P 150473 299 WASHER, Flat, 13/32" x 1-1/4" x 7/64" Thick .............................. 6 –12 P 146660 566 SUPPORT, Rack .......................................................................... 1 –

Amsco® century® medium steam sterilizers

Engineering

Transcript of Amsco® century® medium steam sterilizers